Canon All in One Printer 2237B001AA User Manual

What Can I Do with This Machine?  
Before Using the Machine  
Original and Paper  
Copying  
Basic Operation Guide  
Sending Documents  
Receiving Documents  
Printing  
Scanning  
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)  
PC Faxing  
Remote UI  
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)  
Maintenance  
Troubleshooting  
Machine Settings  
Appendix  
Please read this guide before operating this product.  
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What Can I Do with This  
Machine?  
Copy Features  
Select a scan mode depending on the  
type of image  
Original Type Selection  
Adjust the density level of scanned  
images  
Exposure  
Enlarge or reduce copied images  
Copy Ratio  
Sort by document or page  
Collate Copying  
Make two-sided copies  
Two‑Sided Copying  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copy facing pages of an opened book  
onto separate copy sheets  
Two‑Page Separation  
Reference Guide  
Copy multiple originals onto one  
sheet  
Image Combination  
Reference Guide  
Erase shadows and lines around original  
images or binding holes  
Frame Erase  
Reference Guide  
Copy originals of different sizes  
together at the same time  
Different Size Originals  
Reference Guide  
Adjust the contrast of scanned images  
Sharpness  
Reference Guide  
Store and recall copy modes  
Memory Keys  
Reference Guide  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending/Receiving Features  
Send documents with diverse sending  
1
methods *  
Fax, E‑Mail, I‑Fax and File Server  
Chapter 4  
Send documents in a variety of file  
1
formats *  
Setting the File Format  
Specify a recipient with the Address  
Book  
Using the Address Book  
Specify a recipient with one-touch  
buttons  
Using the One‑Touch Buttons  
Specify a recipient with favorites  
buttons  
Using the Favorites Buttons  
*1 Indicates the features available only for the imageCLASS MF7480.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specify multiple recipients as a group  
Using Group Addresses  
Retry sending documents  
1
automatically *  
Auto Retry  
Reference Guide  
Redial when the line is busy  
Automatic Redialing  
Reference Guide  
Send documents to multiple  
recipients  
Broadcasting  
Reference Guide  
Send documents at a specified time  
Delayed Sending  
Reference Guide  
*1 Indicates the features available only for the imageCLASS MF7480.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recall the last three sending jobs  
Job Recall  
Forward received documents  
Forwarding Documents  
Reference Guide  
Receive documents in memory  
without printing out  
Memory Lock Reception  
Reference Guide  
Send a fax from a PC  
PC Faxing  
Fax Driver Guide  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Feature  
Print a document from a PC  
Printing  
PCL Driver Guide and UFR II Driver Guide  
Scanner Feature  
Specify detailed scanning options to  
1
suit various images *  
Scanning  
Color Network ScanGear User’s Guide  
Remote UI Feature  
Access and manage the machine from  
1
a PC *  
Remote UI  
Reference Guide  
*1 Indicates the features available only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Settings  
Restrict the use of the machine with  
department IDs  
Department ID Management  
Reference Guide  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contents  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Thank you for choosing a Canon product. Before using the machine, please read the  
following instructions for your safety.  
Important Safety Instructions  
Please read these “Important Safety Instructionsthoroughly before operating the  
machine. As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user or other persons  
or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions. Also, since it may  
result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise  
specified in the manual. Improper operation or use of this machine could result in personal  
injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair that may not be covered under your  
Limited Warranty.  
Handling and Maintenance  
– Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine. There are high‑temperature and  
high‑voltage components inside the machine which may result in a fire or electrical  
shock.  
– If the machine makes strange noises, or gives off smoke, heat, or strange smells,  
immediately turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Then, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer  
Care Center. Continued use of the machine in this condition may result in a fire or  
electrical shock.  
– Do not use highly flammable sprays near the machine. If gas from these sprays comes  
into contact with the electrical components inside the machine, this may result in a fire or  
electrical shock.  
– To avoid damage to the power cord and creating a fire hazard, always turn off the main  
power switch, and unplug the interface cable when moving the machine. Otherwise, the  
power cord or interface cable may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the machine. Also, do  
not spill water, liquids, or flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.)  
inside the machine. If these items come into contact with a high‑voltage area inside the  
machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled  
inside the machine, immediately turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the  
power cord from the power outlet. Then contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or  
the Canon Customer Care Center.  
– Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as they may tip over or fall resulting in  
personal injury.  
– Close the feeder gently to avoid catching your hands, as this may result in personal injury.  
– Do not press down hard on the feeder when using the platen glass to make copies of  
thick books. Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in personal injury.  
– Do not put your hand close to the rollers on the output tray. The machine may suddenly  
begin to print even if it is not in operation, causing your clothing or fingers to become  
caught in the machine and resulting in injury.  
– If the laser beam escapes from the machine, exposure may cause serious damage to your  
eyes.  
– The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. Since radiation emitted inside the  
product is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser  
beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Read the  
following remarks and instructions for safety.  
– Be careful when removing printed paper from output trays or when aligning it, because it  
may be hot and result in burn injury.  
– Turn off the control panel power switch for safety when the machine will not be used  
for a long period of time, such as overnight. Also, turn off the main power switch, and  
disconnect the power cord for safety when the machine will not be used for an extended  
period of time, such as during consecutive holidays.  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Never open covers other than those instructed in this manual.  
– Do not remove the caution label attached to the fixing unit and the duplex unit.  
– When cleaning the machine, first turn off the main power switch, and then disconnect  
the power cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
– Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around  
the base of the power plug’s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure  
that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long period of  
time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and  
become damp. This may cause a short circuit and result in a fire.  
– Clean the machine using a slightly dampened cloth with a mild detergent mixed with  
water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. Check  
detergent for flammability prior to use. If flammable substances come into contact with a  
high‑voltage area inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
– There are some area inside the machine which are subject to high‑voltage. When  
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow  
necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this  
may result in burns or electrical shock.  
– Do not burn or throw used cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner  
remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– The fixing unit, the duplex unit, and their surroundings inside the machine may become  
hot during use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the  
machine, do not touch the fixing unit, the duplex unit, and their surroundings, as doing  
so may result in burns.  
– When removing jammed paper or replacing the cartridge, take care not to allow the  
toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or  
clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them  
with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.  
– When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the  
jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into  
your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately  
with cold water and immediately consult a physician.  
– When loading paper or removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your  
hands on the edges of the originals or paper.  
– When removing a used cartridge, remove the cartridge carefully to prevent the toner  
from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or  
mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.  
– The machine is heavy, and requires two or more people to lift it. Therefore, do not  
attempt to move it by yourself. Doing so may result in personal injury.  
– Do not lift the machine by any of its attachments.  
xx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– When carrying the machine, be sure to hold the parts indicated below. Failure to do so  
may cause the machine to be dropped and result in injury.  
– If you have a back problem, make sure to check the weight of this machine before  
carrying. (See “Specifications,on p. 13‑2.)  
Location  
– Do not install the machine near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If  
flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may  
result in a fire or electrical shock.  
– Do not place the following items on the machine. If these items come into contact with  
a high‑voltage area inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these  
items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn off the main power  
switch, and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Then, contact Canon  
Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center.  
– Necklaces and other metal objects  
– Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– Do not install the machine in unstable locations, such as on unsteady platforms or  
inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the  
machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.  
– Never block the ventilation slots and louvers on the machine. These openings are  
provided for proper ventilation of working parts inside the machine. Blocking these  
openings can cause the machine to overheat. Never place the machine on a soft surface,  
such as a sofa or rug.  
– Do not install the machine in the following locations:  
– A damp or dusty location  
– A location near water faucets or water  
– A location exposed to direct sunlight  
– A location subject to high temperatures  
– A location near open flames  
– Provide enough space on each side of the machine for unrestricted operation.  
4" (100 mm) or more  
49 1/4" (1,249 mm)*  
40" (1,016 mm)  
* The depth is 50 5/8"(1,281mm) when  
the cartridge holder is pulled out.  
– Be sure to provide enough space over the top of the machine to be able to open the  
feeder properly.  
xxii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Supply  
– Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power  
cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage and result in  
a fire or electrical shock.  
– Keep the power cord away from a heat source; failure to do this may cause the power  
cord coating to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.  
– Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in  
electrical shock.  
– Do not connect the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or  
electrical shock.  
– Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a fire or electrical  
shock.  
– Insert the power plug completely into the power outlet, as failure to do so may result in a  
fire or electrical shock.  
– Do not use power cords other than the power cord provided, as this may result in a fire or  
electrical shock.  
– As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire  
or electrical shock. If an extension cord must be used, however, use one rated for voltages  
of 120 V AC and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug completely into  
the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the  
extension cord.  
– Do not use power supplies with voltages other than those specified herein, as this may  
result in a fire or electrical shock.  
– Always grasp the power plug when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the power  
cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the  
power cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical  
shock.  
– Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily.  
If objects are placed around the power plug, you will be unable to unplug it in an  
emergency.  
– Make sure that the power supply for the machine is safe, and has a steady voltage.  
– Do not connect other electrical equipment to the same power outlet to which the  
machine is connected.  
xxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– The power cord may become damaged if it is often stepped on or if heavy objects are  
placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an accident, such as a  
fire or electrical shock.  
This product emits low level magnetic flux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move  
away from this product and consult your doctor.  
Customer Support (U.S.A.)  
Your machine is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble‑free operation.  
If you encounter a problem with the machine’s operation, try to solve it by using the  
information in Chapter 7, “Troubleshooting,If you cannot solve the problem or if you  
think your machine needs servicing, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the  
Canon Customer Care Center at 1‑800‑828‑4040 between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00  
P.M. EST Monday through Friday and 10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. on Saturday. For interactive  
troubleshooting, e‑mail technical support, the latest driver downloads and answers to  
frequently asked questions you can also visit our support site at www.canontechsupport.  
com.  
Customer Support (Canada)  
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:  
– For interactive troubleshooting, e‑mail technical support, the latest driver downloads and  
answers to frequently asked questions (www.canon.ca)  
– Automated interactive telephone support on most current products 24 hours, 7 days a  
week (1‑800‑652‑2666).  
– Free live technical support 9:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding  
holidays) for products still under warranty (1‑800‑652‑2666)  
xxiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– The location of the authorized service facility nearest you (1‑800‑652‑2666) If the  
problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair  
options are available at the time of your call to the Free live technical support number  
above or via the website at www.canon.ca  
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.  
xxv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Use This Manual  
Symbols Used in This Manual  
The following symbols are used throughout the manuals for the machine and indicate the  
warnings, cautions and notes you should keep in mind when using the machine.  
Indicates a warning that may lead to death or serious injury if not observed.  
Explains how to avoid actions that could injure you or damage your  
machine.  
Explains operating restrictions and how to avoid minor difficulties.  
Keys Used in This Manual  
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are  
expressed in this manual:  
Touch Panel Display Keys:  
[Key Name]  
[Cancel]  
Examples:  
[Done]  
Control Panel Keys:  
key icon (Key Name)  
(Start)  
Examples:  
(Stop)  
Items on Computer Operation Screens:  
[Item Name]  
[Save]  
Examples:  
[OK]  
xxvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Displays Used in This Manual  
The keys which you should press are marked with the hand symbol ( ), as shown below.  
3
Press this key for operation.  
xxvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Notices  
Copyright  
Copyright 2007 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be  
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any  
language or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,  
magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of  
Canon Inc.  
Disclaimers  
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.  
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,  
THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON‑INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES  
OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.  
LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR  
DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS.  
For CA, USA only  
Included battery contains Perchlorate Material ‑ special handling may apply.  
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.  
xxviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of  
Images  
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use  
of such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be  
prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability.  
A non‑exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a  
guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or  
otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned,  
printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for  
guidance.  
– Paper Money  
– Travelers Checks  
– Food Stamps  
– Passports  
– Money Orders  
– Certificates of Deposit  
– Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled) – Immigration Papers  
– Identifying Badges or Insignias  
– Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or  
uncanceled)  
– Selective Service or Draft Papers  
– Bonds or Other Certificates of  
Indebtedness  
– Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental – Stock Certificates  
Agencies  
– Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of – Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without  
Title  
Permission of Copyright Owner  
xxix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Trademarks  
Canon, the Canon logo, and imageCLASS are trademarks of Canon Inc.  
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and other countries.  
Windows Vista is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other  
countries. All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or  
service marks of their respective owners.  
International Energy Star-Program  
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Canon U.S.A., Inc. has determined that this  
product meets the ENERGY STAR Program for energy efficiency.  
The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an  
international program that promotes energy saving through the use of  
computers and other office equipment.  
The program backs the development and dissemination of products  
with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an  
open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily.  
The targeted products are office equipment, such as computers,  
displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are  
uniform among participating nations.  
IPv6 Ready Logo  
This machine has acquired IPv6 Ready Logo Phase‑1, as established by  
the IPv6 Forum.  
xxx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Super G3  
Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new generation of fax  
machines that use ITU‑T V.34 standard 33.6 Kbps* modems. Super G3  
High Speed Fax machines allow transmission times of approximately 3  
seconds* per page which results in reduced telephone line charges.  
* Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission time based on  
CCITT/ITU‑T No.1 Chart, (JBIG, Standard Mode) at 33.6 Kbps modem  
speed. The PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) currently  
supports 28.8 Kbps modem speeds or slower, depending on  
telephone line conditions.  
xxxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Users in the U.S.A.  
Preinstallation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment  
A. Location  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See p. 13‑2 for specific dimensions  
and weight.  
B. Order Information  
1. A single telephone line (touch‑tone or rotary) should be used.  
2. Order an RJ11‑C telephone wall jack (USOC), which should be installed by the telephone  
company. If the RJ11‑C wall jack is not present, telephone/facsimile operation is not  
possible.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business representative. The  
line should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one line per unit.  
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line  
‑or‑  
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch‑tone) or 500  
(rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit without  
“Call Waiting” can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended because  
they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a  
facsimile error.  
C. Power Requirements  
The machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC, three‑wire grounded outlet only.  
Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances that  
cause “electrical noise.” Air conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of this  
sort generate electrical noise that often interferes with communications equipment and the  
sending and receiving of documents.  
xxxii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connection of the Equipment  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted  
by the ACTA. On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains, among other  
information, a product identifier in the format of US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this  
number must be provided to the telephone company.  
The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) is used to determine the number of devices that  
may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result  
in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the  
sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that  
may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone  
company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:  
AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 10  
is a REN of 1.0).  
An FCC compliant telephone line cable and modular plug is provided with this equipment.  
This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premise wiring  
using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant.  
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company.  
Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs.  
In Case of Equipment Malfunction  
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures described  
in this guide or the Reference Guide, disconnect the equipment from the telephone line  
cable and disconnect the power cord. The telephone line cable should not be reconnected  
or the main power switch turned ON until the problem is completely resolved. Users  
should contact their local authorized Canon Facsimile Service Dealer for the servicing of  
equipment.  
If your equipment malfunctions, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer  
from whom you purchased the equipment (if under warranty), or with whom you have a  
servicing contract. If you are not sure who to contact, and have both purchased and are  
using the equipment in the U.S.A., please refer to the “SUPPORTpage on Canon U.S.A.’s  
Web site (http://www.usa.canon.com).  
xxxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rights of the Telephone Company  
If this equipment (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470/MF7460) causes harm to the telephone  
network, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. The telephone  
company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and services that may affect the  
operation of this equipment. When such changes are necessary, the telephone company  
is required to give adequate prior notice to the user. However, if advance notice is not  
possible, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, the  
customer will be advised of his/her right to file a complaint with the FCC if he/she believes  
it is necessary.  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other  
electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains  
in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and  
time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and  
the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.  
In order to program this information into your machine, complete the procedure for registering your name,  
unit’s telephone number, time, and date in the Starter Guide.  
FCC (Federal Communications Commission) Notice  
imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470/MF7460: Model F189900  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) this device must accept an interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
xxxiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B  
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,  
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
– Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver  
is connected.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Use of shielded cables are required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of  
the FCC Rules.  
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified  
in this manual. If you make such changes or modifications, you could be required to stop  
operation of the equipment.  
If your equipment malfunctions, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer  
from whom you purchased the equipment (if under warranty), or with whom you have  
a servicing contact. If you are not sure who to contact, and have both purchased and are  
using the equipment in the U.S.A., please refer to the “SUPPORTpage on Canon USA’s Web  
site (http://www.usa.canon.com).  
Canon U.S.A., Inc.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
TEL No. 1‑516‑328‑5600  
xxxv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Users in Canada  
Preinstallation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment  
A. Location  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See p. 13‑2 for specific dimensions  
and weight.  
B. Order Information  
1. A single telephone line (touch‑tone or rotary) should be used.  
2. Order a CA11A modular jack which should be installed by the telephone company. If the  
CA11A jack is not present, installation cannot occur.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business representative. The  
line should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one line per unit.  
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line  
‑or‑  
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch‑tone) or 500  
(rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit without  
“Call Waiting” can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended because  
they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a  
facsimile error.  
C. Power Requirements  
The power outlet should be a three‑prong grounded receptacle (Single or Duplex). It should  
be independent from copiers, heaters, air conditioners, or any electric equipment that is  
thermostatically controlled. The rated value is 115 volts and 15 amperes. The CA11A modular  
jack should be relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate installation.  
xxxvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice  
– This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.  
– The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices  
allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may  
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of  
the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.  
– The REN of this product is 1.0.  
– Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be  
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment  
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases,  
the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be  
extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The  
customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent  
deterioration of service in some situations.  
– Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance  
facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this  
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company  
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
– Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of  
the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are  
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.  
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the  
appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.  
This equipment complies with the Canadian ICES‑003 Class B limits.  
xxxvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Utilisation au Canada  
Conditions à Remplir Préalablement à L’installation d’un  
Télécopieur Canon  
A. Emplacement  
Prévoir une table, un meuble, ou un bureau suffisamment solide et de taille appropriée. Voir la  
page 13‑2 pour les indications de poids et dimensions.  
B. Installation téléphonique  
1. Une seule ligne téléphonique (tonalités ou impulsions) doit être utilisée.  
2. Il faut commander un jack modulaire CA11A qui sera installé par la compagnie  
téléphonique. Sans ce jack, la mise en place serait impossible.  
3. Si vous vous abonnez à une nouvelle ligne, demandez une ligne d’affaires normale de  
qualité téléphonique courante ou équivalente. Prenez un abonnement d’une ligne par  
appareil.  
Ligne automatique interurbaine  
ou  
Ligne automatique internationale (si vous communiquez avec les pays étrangers)  
Canon vous conseille d’utiliser une ligne individuelle conforme aux normes industrielles, à savoir: ligne  
téléphonique 2,500 (pour appareil à clavier) ou 500 (pour appareil à cadran/impulsions). Il est également  
possible de raccorder ce télécopieur à un système téléphonique à poussoirs car la plupart de ces systèmes  
émettent des signaux d’appel non normalisés ou des codes spéciaux qui risquent de perturber le  
fonctionnement du télécopieur.  
C. Condition d’alimentation  
Raccordez le télécopieur à une prise de courant plus terre à trois branches, du type simple ou  
double, et qui ne sert pas à alimenter un copieur, un appareil de chauffage, un climatiseur ou  
tout autre appareil électrique à thermostat. L’alimentation doit être de 115 volts et 15 ampères.  
Pour faciliter l’installation, le jack CA11A doit être assez proche de la prise de courant.  
xxxviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remarques  
– Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d’Industrie  
Canada.  
– Avant d’installer cet appareil, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est permis de le connecter  
à l’équipement de la compagnie de télécommunication locale et doit installer cet  
appareil en utilisant une méthode de connexion autorisée. Il se peut qu’il faille étendre  
la circuiterie intérieure de la ligne individuelle d’abonné, qui a été installée par la  
compagnie, au moyen d’un jeu de connecteurs homologues (rallonge téléphonique).  
L’attention de l’utilisateur est attirée sur le fait que le respect des conditions mentionnées  
ci‑dessus ne constitue pas une garantie contre les dégradations de qualité du service  
dans certaines circonstances.  
L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de  
terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison  
d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule  
condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs  
n’excède pas 5.  
– Le nombre d’équivalents sonnerie (REN) de ce produit est 1,0.  
– Les réparations sur un appareil certifié doivent être faites par une société d’entretien  
canadienne autorisée par le Gouvernement canadien et désignée par le fournisseur.  
Toute réparation ou modification que pourrait faire I’utilisateur de cet appareil, ou tout  
mauvais fonctionnement, donne à la compagnie de télécommunication le droit de  
débrancher I’appareil.  
– Pour sa propre protection, I’utilisateur doit s’assurer que les prises de terre de I’appareil  
d’alimentation, les lignes téléphoniques et les tuyaux métalliques internes, s’il y en a, sont  
bien connectés entre eux. Cette précaution est particulièrement importante dans les  
zones rurales.  
Au lieu d’essayer de faire ces branchements eux‑mêmes, les utilisateurs sont invités à faire  
appel à un service d’inspection faisant autorité en matière d’électricité ou à un électricien,  
selon le cas.  
Respecte les limites de la classe B de la NMB‑003 du Canada.  
xxxix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Laser Safety  
This product complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class I laser product  
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance  
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Also, this  
product is certified as a Class I laser product under IEC60825‑1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001,  
EN60825‑1:1994+A1:2002+A2:2001. This means that the product does not produce  
hazardous laser radiation.  
Since radiation emitted inside the product is completely confined within protective  
housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any  
phase of user operation. Do not remove protective housings or external covers, except as  
directed by this guide.  
The labels shown below are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and next  
to the cartridge, behind the front cover.  
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result  
in hazardous radiation exposure.  
xl  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Using the  
1 Machine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Machine Components  
A
Feeder  
External View  
Originals placed in the feeder are automatically  
fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area of the  
platen glass. The feeder also automatically turns  
over two‑sided originals to make two or one  
sided copies.  
B
Main Power Switch  
Press to the “Iside to turn the power on. (See  
p. 1‑7.)  
C
Paper Drawers  
Holds up to 250 sheets of paper (22 lb bond  
(80 g/m2)).  
D
Stack Bypass  
Use the stack bypass to feed paper manually  
and for loading nonstandard paper stock, such  
as envelopes. (See “Into the Stack Bypass,on  
p. 2‑15.)  
E
Main Control Panel  
Includes the keys, touch panel display, and  
indicators required for operating the machine.  
p. 1‑7.)  
1‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A
B
Feeder Cover  
Feeder  
Open this cover to remove jammed originals.  
Slide Guides  
Adjust the slide guides to match the width of  
the original.  
C
Original Supply Tray  
Originals placed here are automatically fed  
sheet by sheet to the scanning area of the  
platen glass. Place originals into this tray with  
the surface that you want to scan face up.  
D
Original Output Area  
Originals that have been scanned from the  
original supply tray are output to the original  
output area in the order that they are fed into  
the feeder.  
– Do not insert your fingers into the gaps around the  
original supply tray, as your fingers may get caught.  
Also, be careful not to drop objects, such as paper  
clips into the gaps, as doing so may cause damage  
to the machine or cause it to break down.  
– When using the platen glass to copy or scan thick  
originals, such as books or magazines, do not press  
down hard on the feeder.  
– If the original output area is blocked, originals may  
get damaged, and printing may not be performed  
correctly. Therefore, do not place any objects in the  
original output area.  
1‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A
B
Platen Glass  
Place originals here when scanning books, thick  
originals, thin originals, transparencies, etc.  
Internal View  
Cartridge  
When toner runs out, pull out the cartridge, and  
replace it with a new one.  
C
Front Cover  
Open this cover to replace the cartridge.  
D
Paper Drawer’s Left Cover  
Open these covers when clearing a paper jam in  
Paper Drawer 2.  
E
Fixing Unit  
When paper jam occurs in the fixing unit, see  
F
Left Cover  
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam  
inside the machine or replacing the cartridge.  
G
H
Duplex Unit  
The duplex unit enables you to use the 2‑Sided  
mode for copying or printing.  
Scanning Area  
Originals placed in the feeder are scanned here.  
1‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control Panel  
A
B
COPY key  
G
H
Serial No. key  
Press to display the serial number on the touch  
panel display.  
Press to use the Copy function. The Copy Basic  
Features screen appears on the touch panel  
display.  
Stop key  
SEND key  
Press to stop a job in progress, such as a scan,  
copy, or fax job (scanning only).  
Press to use the Send/Fax function. The Send  
Basic Features screen appears on the touch  
panel display. The Send function is available  
only for the imageCLASS MF7480.  
I
Start key  
Press to start an operation.  
J
K
L
Main Power Indicator  
C
SCAN key (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470  
Only)  
Press to enable the Network Scan function. (See  
the Color Network ScanGear User’s Guide.)  
Lights when the main power is turned on.  
Clear key  
Press to clear entered values or characters.  
D
Reset key  
Error Indicator  
Press to restore the standard settings of the  
machine.  
Flashes or lights if there is an error in the  
machine. When the Error indicator flashes,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display. When the Error indicator  
maintains a steady red light, contact Canon  
Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon  
Customer Care Center.  
E
F
Numeric keys  
Press to enter numerical values.  
Control Panel Power Switch (Sub Power  
Supply)  
Press to turn the control panel on or off. When  
the control panel is turned off, the machine is in  
the Sleep mode.  
1‑5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
M
N
Log In/Out key  
Press when setting or enabling Department ID  
Management or User ID Management.  
Processing/Data Indicator  
Flashes or blinks green when the machine is  
performing operations. When the Processing/  
Data indicator maintains a steady green light,  
fax data is stored in memory.  
O
Display Contrast Dial  
Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel  
display.  
P
Additional Functions key  
Press to specify additional functions.  
Q
Touch Panel Display  
The settings screen for each function is shown  
on this display.  
1‑6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Main Power and Control Panel Power  
The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch and a control  
panel power switch.  
How to Turn On the Main Power  
This section explains how to turn on the main power.  
When the machine is ready to scan, the  
1
Make sure that the power plug  
is firmly inserted into the power  
outlet.  
screen below is displayed. The example  
shown below is the Copy Basic Features  
screen.  
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord  
with wet hands, as this may result in electrical  
shock.  
2
Press the main power switch to “I”  
side.  
– If the main power indicator does not light,  
make sure that the power cord is firmly  
inserted into the power outlet.  
– If the message <Enter the Department ID  
and Password using the numeric keys.>  
or <Enter the User ID and Password.>  
appears on the touch panel display, enter  
your registered ID and password. (See  
p. 1‑17.)  
The main power indicator on the control  
panel lights and the screen below is displayed  
until the machine is ready to scan.  
1‑7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
– If you want to turn the main power off, first turn the control panel power switch off, and then press the main  
power switch to the “ ” side.  
– If you turn off the main power, wait at least 10 seconds before turning the main power back on.  
– Do not turn the main power off if you want to be able to send or receive fax/I‑fax documents. Sending or  
receiving fax/I‑fax documents cannot be done when the main power is turned off.  
– If User ID Management is set to [On], the machine will take longer to become ready to scan.  
– You can set the initial screen (the first screen that appears when the machine is turned on) from the  
Additional Functions screen. The initial screen can be the Copy, Send, Scan, or System Monitor screen. (See  
Common Settings,” on p. 12‑6.)  
– The machine will enter the Sleep mode if the main power switch is pressed when the machine’s power is on  
and a certain type of optional equipment is connected.  
1‑8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Panel Power Switch  
To turn the control panel on or off, press the control panel power switch. When turned off,  
the machine is in the Sleep mode.  
Control Panel Power Switch  
Machine Status  
Standby mode (ready for immediate copying or printing)  
Sleep mode  
On  
Off  
– The machine can receive and print documents from a personal computer when it is in the Sleep mode.  
Fax/I‑fax documents can also be received while the machine is in the Sleep mode.  
– The energy consumption while the machine is in the Sleep mode can be set from the Additional Functions  
screen. (See “Common Settings,” on p. 12‑6.)  
– The machine will not enter the Sleep mode if it is scanning or printing.  
– If there is less time than specified in Auto Sleep Time remaining before sending a job which has been reserved  
for delayed sending, the machine will not enter the Sleep mode completely.  
– If there is a job which has been reserved for delayed sending, the machine will not enter the Sleep mode  
completely.  
– If you are using a management application to view or manage the settings and status of the machine via the  
network, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely.  
– If you are using the machine as a Windows printer, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely if  
SNMP Status is enabled for your operating system (unless your computer is turned off). For more information  
on disabling SNMP Status, contact your network administrator.  
– It takes approximately 10 seconds for the machine to recover after the Sleep mode is deactivated.  
– If Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to [Low], it may take more than 10 seconds for the touch panel  
display to be displayed after pressing the control panel power switch.  
– The energy consumption level in the Sleep mode is [High] even when the energy consumption level is set to  
[Low], such as when a job is being processed (including a forwarding job, report job, receive job, or sending a  
forwarding done notice).  
1‑9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Touch Panel Display  
Most operations on this machine are executed from the touch panel display. By  
pressing the keys according to the instructions on the touch panel display, you can  
utilize the functions of this machine efficiently.  
Press the touch panel display keys gently with your fingers. Do not press the touch panel display with a pencil,  
ballpoint pen, or other sharp objects that can scratch the surface of the touch panel display. Doing so may  
damage the touch panel display.  
Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.  
Frequently Used Keys  
The keys that are used frequently on the touch panel display are:  
Press to cancel the mode that you are currently setting, or a  
mode that has already been set, on screens other than the  
Additional Functions screen. Also, press to close the current  
mode’s setting screen, and keep the original settings set  
from the Additional Functions screen.  
Press to confirm the current settings and proceed to the  
next step in the procedure.  
Press to go back to the previous step in the procedure,  
without saving the current settings.  
Press to close the current screen.  
Press to confirm the current settings of a mode.  
1‑10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Touch Panel Key Display  
When you press a key on the touch panel display, that key is highlighted, and the  
corresponding mode is set. When you set certain modes, the characters on some keys may  
become grayed out. You cannot press keys that are grayed out. This means that you cannot  
set these modes in combination with the presently set mode.  
Mode Setting Keys  
State of Keys  
Description  
The 2‑Page Separation mode is not set, and can  
be selected.  
The 2‑Page Separation mode is set, and can be  
selected.  
(The key is highlighted)  
The 2‑Page Separation mode cannot be set in  
combination with the presently set mode.  
(The characters on the key are grayed out.)  
Keys That Indicate When a Mode Is Turned On or Off  
Mode Is Turned Off  
Mode Is Turned On  
(Highlighted)  
Keys with a right triangle () indicate that those keys have additional screens to set their  
functions. If you press a key that does not have a right triangle (), it turns that mode on or  
off.  
Keys That Display Additional Settings  
Keys That Turn Modes On/Off  
Keys with a black square () in the lower right corner, that appear on screens for storing  
settings, already have settings stored in them.  
Settings Are Stored  
No Settings Are Stored  
1‑11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keys That Display a Drop‑Down List  
Pressing a key that has a right triangle () to the right of the name of the selection, displays  
a drop‑down list containing other setting options.  
Before Selection  
Drop-Down List  
After Selection  
Numeric Keys  
Anytime the numeric keys icon is displayed on the screen, you can use the numeric keys on  
the control panel to enter values.  
You can enter values using the numeric keys on the touch  
panel display or on the control panel.  
You can only enter values using the numeric keys on the  
control panel.  
1‑12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Entering Characters  
For screens that require alphanumeric entries, enter characters using the keys displayed on  
the touch panel display, as shown below.  
Alphanumeric Characters  
Example: Enter <Canon>.  
1
Make sure that <Alphabet> is displayed  
above [Entry Mode].  
Each press of [Entry Mode] switches the  
entry mode between <Alphabet> and  
<Other>.  
Enter <Canon>.  
– To enter uppercase letters, press [Shift].  
– To enter a space, press [Space].  
– To move the cursor, press [] or [].  
– To enter symbols, press [Entry Mode]  
to select [Other], then enter the desired  
symbols.  
– If you make a mistake when entering  
characters, press [] or [] to position the  
cursor on the right side of the characters  
to be deleted, then press [Backspace] to  
delete the characters and enter the correct  
characters.  
– To delete all of the characters you have  
entered, press (Clear).  
– The available entry modes, and the  
maximum number of characters that you  
can enter vary, depending on the type of  
entries you are making.  
Press [OK].  
1‑13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Symbols  
Example: Enter <é>.  
1
Press [Entry Mode] to select [Other].  
Press [] or [] to display the desired  
symbol that you want to enter.  
Press [é].  
– To enter a space, press [Space].  
– To move the cursor, press [] or [].  
– To enter alphanumeric characters, press  
[Entry Mode] to select [Alphabet], then  
enter the desired characters.  
– If you make a mistake when entering  
characters, press [] or [] to position the  
cursor on the right side of the characters  
to be deleted, then press [Backspace] to  
delete the characters and enter the correct  
characters.  
– To delete all of the characters you have  
entered, press (Clear).  
– The available entry modes, and the  
maximum number of characters that you  
can enter vary, depending on the type of  
entries you are making.  
Press [OK].  
1‑14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Values in Inches  
If you want to enter values in inches in all modes which require a numeric entry, set Inch  
Entry to [On] in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See “Common  
Settings,on p. 12‑6.) This enables you to enter values in inches when you press [Inch] on a  
screen requiring a numeric entry or measurement.  
The default entry mode for numeric values is inches, but you can change it to millimeters by  
turning the Inch Entry mode [Off].  
The following example shows you how to enter 5 1/2" for X value in the Irregular Size mode.  
1
Press the keys in the following order: [5],  
[_], [1], [/], and [2].  
– If you make a mistake when entering  
values, press [C], then enter the correct  
values.  
– You can enter only 2, 4, 8, or 16 as the  
denominator.  
– The value entered in inches is converted  
to millimeters by the machine each time  
it is entered. Thus, there may be a slight  
difference between the value calculated  
and the actual value entered.  
– To enter values in millimeters, press [mm].  
1‑15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adjusting the Brightness  
If the touch panel display is difficult to view, use the display contrast dial on the control  
panel to adjust its brightness.  
To make the touch panel display brighter, turn the dial counterclockwise. To make it darker, turn the dial  
clockwise.  
1‑16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Department/User ID Management  
If Department ID Management or User ID Management is set to [On] in System  
Settings, you must enter your ID and password to be able to operate the machine. For  
details, see Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference Guide.  
Procedure before Using the Machine  
Department ID Management  
1
2
3
4
Enter the Department ID using  
(numeric keys).  
If the password is set, enter the password  
using (numeric keys).  
The numbers that you enter for the  
password are displayed as asterisks  
(*******).  
1‑17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
Press  
(Log In/Out).  
The Basic Features screen of the selected  
function appears on the touch panel display.  
User ID Management  
1
3
4
2
Enter the User ID.  
Enter the password.  
You can also enter the User ID using  
You can also enter the password using  
(numeric keys).  
(numeric keys).  
Press [OK].  
Press [OK].  
1‑18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Press  
(Log In/Out).  
The Basic Features screen of the selected  
function appears on the touch panel display.  
Procedure after Using the Machine  
1
Be sure to press  
(Log In/Out).  
If you do not press  
(Log In/Out) after you  
are finished operating the machine, any  
subsequent copies and scans for Send/Fax  
functions made are added to the total of the  
Department ID you previously entered, or the  
total of the User ID who previously logged on  
to the machine.  
1‑19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cartridge  
The lifetime of the Canon genuine replacement cartridge is approximately 10,000  
pages. The level of toner consumption varies depending on the type of originals  
printed. If your average original contains a lot of graphics, tables, or charts, the life of  
the cartridge will be shorter as they consume more toner. When you are replacing a  
cartridge, be sure to use a cartridge designed for this product. To purchase the Canon  
genuine replacement cartridge, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or Canon  
Customer Care Center (U.S.A.:1-800-828-4040, Canada:1-800-652-2666).  
Cartridge name:  
Canon Cartridge 105  
1‑20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintaining the Cartridge  
Keep the cartridge away from computer screens, disk drives, and floppy disks. The  
magnet inside the cartridge may harm these items.  
Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or rapid changes in  
temperature.  
Do not expose the cartridge to direct sunlight or bright light for more than five minutes.  
Store the cartridge in its protective bag. Do not open the bag until you are ready to install  
the cartridge in the machine.  
Save the toner cartridge’s protective bag in case you need to repack and transport the  
cartridge at a later date.  
Do not store the cartridge in a salty atmosphere or where there are corrosive gases such  
as from aerosol sprays.  
Do not remove the cartridge from the machine unnecessarily.  
Do not open the drum protective shutter on the cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if  
the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged.  
Always hold the cartridge by its handle to avoid touching the drum protective shutter.  
Do not stand the cartridge on end, and do not turn it upside down. If toner becomes  
caked in the toner cartridge, it may become impossible to free it even by shaking the  
cartridge.  
If there is a toner powder leakage, make sure not to inhale or touch the toner powder. If it  
comes in contact with your skin, rinse with cold water using soap. If you feel an irritation  
on your skin or inhale the powder, consult a doctor immediately.  
When removing the cartridge from the machine, make sure to remove it carefully. If not  
removed with care, the toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes  
and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately.  
Keep the cartridge away from small children. If they ingest the toner powder, consult a  
doctor immediately.  
Do not disassemble the cartridge. The toner powder may scatter and come in contact  
with your eyes and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor  
immediately.  
Do not place the cartridge in fire. Toner powder is flammable.  
1‑21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Timer Settings  
Setting the Sleep Mode  
If the machine is idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or key operation is  
performed), the control panel power switch automatically switches off to save power. The  
machine has entered the Sleep mode.  
4
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
Press [On].  
Press [‑] or [+] to specify the desired Auto  
Sleep Time.  
The Auto Sleep Time can be set from 3 to  
30 minutes.  
You can also enter values using  
3
(numeric keys).  
Press [OK].  
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the  
Basic Features screen appears.  
1‑22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
– To resume normal mode from the Sleep mode, press the control panel power switch.  
– To enter the Sleep mode manually, press the control panel power switch.  
– The machine can continue to receive fax/I‑fax documents, and process or print data sent from computers  
even if the machine is in the Sleep mode.  
Setting Auto Clear Time  
If the machine is idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or key operation  
is performed), the display returns to the Basic Features screen (standard settings) of the  
selected function. This period of time is called the “Auto Clear Time.”  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
4
Press [‑] or [+] to specify the desired Auto  
Clear Time.  
The Auto Clear Time can be set from 0 to 9  
minutes (in one minute increments).  
You can also enter values using  
3
(numeric keys).  
Press [OK].  
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the  
Basic Features screen appears.  
1‑23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Checking Device Status  
You can check the current machine status both on the Job/Print Status Display Area  
and on the Device status screen.  
The Job/Print Status Display Area (A) displays the progress of jobs and copy  
operations, and the status of your machine and consumables. Also, the current  
Department ID or user name can be displayed here. (See Chapter 8, “System Settings,”  
in the Reference Guide.)  
For the Device status screen, press [System Monitor] (B) to display the System Monitor  
screen, then press [Device]. The Device status screen enables you to check the  
following information:  
1‑24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A
B
Displays the status of the device and the current job.  
Displays recovery procedures for problems, such as clearing a paper jam or replacing  
the cartridge.  
C
D
E
Displays the status of toner by pressing [Consumable].  
Displays the remaining amount of available system memory.  
Displays the paper supply, paper type, and paper size loaded in the paper drawers or  
the stack bypass.  
The jobs may not be accepted even if <Avail. Memory> has not reached zero percent. In this case, print or delete  
jobs stored in the memory and try again.  
1‑25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1‑26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Original and  
2 Paper  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Original Requirements  
Platen Glass  
Feeder  
Type  
– Plain paper  
– Thick originals  
– Photographs  
Plain paper (Multipage originals  
or one page originals)  
– Small originals (e.g., index cards)  
– Special types of paper (e.g., tracing  
paper*1, transparencies*1, etc.)  
– Book (Height: max. 1" (24 mm))  
Size  
Max. 8 1/2" x 11 5/8"  
(Max. 216 x 297 mm)  
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, STMT  
Weight  
Max. 4.4 lb (2 kg)  
16 to 28 lb bond  
(52 to 105 g/m2)  
Quantity  
1 sheet  
LTR: 50 sheets  
(22 lb bond (80 g/m2))  
LGL/11" x 17": 25 sheets  
(22 lb bond (80 g/m2))  
STMT: 50 sheets  
(22 lb bond (80 g/m2))  
*1 When copying a transparent original such as tracing paper or transparencies, use a piece of plain white paper  
to cover the original after placing it face‑down on the platen glass.  
2‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Do not place the original on the platen glass or into the feeder until the glue, ink or  
correction fluid on the original is completely dry.  
Do not place the following types of originals into the feeder:  
– Wrinkled or creased paper  
– Carbon paper or carbon‑backed paper  
– Curled or rolled paper  
– Coated paper  
– Torn paper  
– Onion skin or thin paper  
– Originals with staples or paper clips attached  
– Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer  
– Originals with tears or large binding holes  
– Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds  
– Transparencies and other highly transparent originals  
2‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning Area  
Make sure your original's text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the  
following diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may  
be slight variations in actual use.  
2‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Originals  
Place your originals on the platen glass or into the feeder, depending on the size and  
type of the original, and the scan modes that you want to use.  
Platen Glass  
Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals (such as books and  
magazines), heavyweight or lightweight originals, and transparencies.  
Feeder  
Place the originals into the feeder when you want to scan several originals at the same  
time, and press (Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to the scanning  
area and scans them. Two‑sided originals can also be automatically turned over and  
scanned as two‑sided originals.  
Original Sizes  
The size of the original is automatically detected, and the original is scanned. If the output  
paper in the recipient’s machine is not equal to the scanned size, the original image may be  
reduced in size or divided into smaller parts before it is sent.  
The machine cannot always detect the size of the original if it is a nonstandard paper size,  
such as a book. In this case, specify the size at which you want to scan the original. (See  
Document Size,on p. 4‑20.)  
2‑5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Orientation  
You can place an original either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your  
original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner) or the  
back edge of the feeder.  
Platen Glass  
Vertical Placement  
Horizontal Placement  
Feeder  
Vertical Placement  
Horizontal Placement  
– If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left  
corner), your original may not be scanned correctly, depending on the scan mode that you have set.  
– Originals of the following sizes can be placed either vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed  
for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than vertically placed ones. Place originals horizontally  
when scanning with a Preset Zoom, such as when enlarging an LTR original onto 11" x 17" paper.  
– Platen glass: LTR, STMT  
– Feeder: LTR  
– Horizontally placed LTR and STMT originals are referred to as LTRR and STMTR.  
– 11" x 17" and LGL originals must be placed horizontally on the feeder.  
2‑6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
On the Platen Glass  
The machine automatically detects the size of the following originals: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, and LTRR.  
1
Lift the feeder.  
Place books and other bound originals on the  
platen glass in the same way.  
When you are enlarging an LTR or STMT  
original onto 11" x 17" or LGL paper, place the  
original horizontally on the platen glass, and  
align it with the LTRR or STMTR marks.  
This machine is equipped with an open/close  
sensor (A) on the feeder (see circled area  
in the above illustration). When placing  
originals on the platen glass, lift the feeder  
high enough so that the sensor does not  
touch the feeder. If the sensor continues to  
touch the feeder, the size of the originals may  
not be detected correctly.  
3
Gently close the feeder.  
2
Place your original face down.  
– Close the feeder gently to avoid catching  
your hands, as this may result in personal  
injury.  
– Do not press down hard on the feeder  
when using the platen glass to make copies  
of thick books. Doing so may damage the  
platen glass and result in personal injury.  
The surface of the original that you want to  
scan must be placed face down.  
Align the top edge of your original with the  
back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in  
the top left corner).  
2‑7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– If you are placing the original on the platen  
glass, the size of the original is detected  
after the feeder is closed. Make sure to  
close the feeder before scanning.  
– Open the feeder and remove the original  
from the platen glass when scanning is  
complete.  
– The machine cannot detect the size of  
STMT and STMTR originals that are placed  
on the platen glass. After pressing (Start),  
follow the instructions on the screen to  
specify the original size. You can also  
manually select the paper size.  
2‑8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Into the Feeder  
– If the same original is fed through the feeder repeatedly, the original may fold or become creased, and make  
feeding impossible. Limit repeated feeding to a maximum of 30 times (this number varies, depending on the  
type and quality of the original).  
– If the feeder rollers are dirty from scanning originals written in pencil, perform the feeder cleaning procedure.  
(See “Cleaning the Machine,” on p. 10‑2.)  
– Always smooth out any folds in your originals before placing them into the feeder.  
– Set the originals one by one if they are very thin (10 to 16 lb (37 to 52 g/m2)) or very thick (28 to 32 lb bond  
(105 to 128 g/m2)).  
– 11" x 17" and LGL originals must be placed horizontally in the feeder.  
Place your originals into the feeder as far as  
they will go.  
1
2
Adjust the slide guides to fit the  
size of your originals.  
If any dirt on the original scanning area is  
detected when the originals are placed in the  
feeder, the following screen appears. Even  
though streaks may appear on the copies,  
you can continue to scan your originals by  
pressing [Done].  
It is recommended, however, that you open  
the feeder, clean the scanning area, and then  
close the feeder. The following screen will not  
appear once the scanning area is clean.  
For instructions on cleaning the original  
scanning area, see “Cleaning the Machine,on  
p. 10‑2.  
Neatly place your originals with  
the side to be copied face up into  
the original supply tray.  
2‑9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– Do not add or remove originals while they  
are being scanned.  
– When scanning is complete, remove the  
originals from the original output area (A)  
to avoid paper jams.  
– When you are enlarging an LTR or STMT  
original onto 11" x 17" or LGL paper, place  
the original horizontally.  
– The scanned originals are output to the  
original output area in the order that they  
are fed into the feeder.  
– You can place different size originals  
together into the feeder if you set the  
Different Size Originals mode. (See chapter  
3, “Copying,” in the Reference Guide.)  
– 11" x 17" and LGL originals must be placed  
horizontally on the feeder.  
2‑10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Requirements  
The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table. Icons  
indicating the type of paper loaded in stack bypass and each paper drawer can be displayed  
on the paper select screen if you store that information in the machine beforehand. (See  
Register Paper Type,on p. 12‑7.)  
: Available  
: Unavailable  
Paper Source  
Paper Type  
Paper Drawer  
Stack Bypass  
Plain*1  
Recycled*1  
Color*1  
3-hole punch*2  
Bond*3  
Transparency*4  
Heavy Paper 1*5  
Heavy Paper 2*6  
Heavy Paper 3*7  
Labels  
Envelopes  
1
2
2
* From 17 lb to 22 lb bond (64 g/m to 80 g/m ).  
2
* Only LTR 3‑hole punch paper can be used.  
3
2
2
* From 20 lb to 24 lb bond (75 g/m to 90 g/m ).  
4
* Use only LTR transparencies made especially for this machine.  
5
2
2
* From 22 lb to 24 lb bond (81 g/m to 90 g/m ).  
6
2
2
* From 24 lb to 28 lb bond (91 g/m to 105 g/m ).  
7
2
2
* From 28 lb to 32 lb bond (106 g/m to 128 g/m ).  
2‑11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
: Available  
: Unavailable  
Paper Source  
Paper Drawer  
1, 2  
Paper Size  
Width x Length  
Stack Bypass  
11" x 17"  
LGL  
11" x 17"  
8 1/2" x 14"  
LTR  
8 1/2" x 11"  
LTRR  
11" x 8 1/2"  
STMT  
STMTR  
EXEC  
8 1/2" x 5 1/2"  
5 1/2" x 8 1/2"  
7 1/4" x 10 1/2"  
4 1/8" x 9 1/2"  
(104.7 mm x 241.3 mm)  
COM 10  
Monarch  
DL  
3 7/8" x 7 1/2"  
(98.4 mm x 190.5 mm)  
4 3/8" x 8 5/8"  
(110 mm x 220 mm)  
Envelope  
7" x 9 7/8"  
(176 mm x 250 mm)  
ISO-B5  
ISO-C5  
6 3/8" x 9"  
(162 mm x 229 mm)  
3 3/4" x 5 7/8" to  
11 3/4" x 17"  
(95 mm x 148 mm to  
297 mm x 432 mm)  
Irregular Size  
2‑12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To prevent paper jams, do not use any of the following:  
– Wrinkled or creased paper  
– Curled or rolled paper  
– Coated paper  
– Torn paper  
– Damp paper  
– Very thin paper  
– Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the  
reverse side.)  
The following types of paper do not print well:  
– Highly textured paper  
– Very smooth paper  
– Shiny paper  
Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains.  
Be sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities.  
Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use. Keep opened packs in  
their original packaging in a cool, dry location.  
Store paper at 64.4°F–75.2°F (18°C–24°C), 40%–60% relative humidity.  
Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers. Canon recommends you to use  
Canon type transparencies with this machine.  
2
Each paper drawer holds approximately 250 sheets of paper (22 lb bond (80 g/m )).  
Note the following points when using the stack bypass:  
2
– Paper Quantity: one to approximately 80 sheets (22 lb bond (80 g/m ), stack  
approximately 3/8" (10 mm) high)  
– Paper Size: 3 3/4" x 5 7/8" to 11 3/4" x 17" (95 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)  
2
– Paper Weight: 18 to 32 lb bond (64 to 128 g/m )  
– Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, to allow  
the paper to feed smoothly through the stack bypass (allowable curl amount: less than  
3/8" (10 mm) for normal paper, less than 1/4" (5 mm) for heavyweight paper). There are  
some types of paper stock which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be  
fed into the stack bypass.  
You can select standard inch paper, or A or B series paper.  
2‑13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printable Area  
The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper. Note that the  
margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.  
2‑14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Paper  
To load paper in the paper drawer, see “Set Up the Machine,in the Starter Guide.  
– If you are making two‑sided prints, select the Two‑sided mode. The printed paper may crease depending on  
the moisture absorption condition of the paper, and if you copy the two pages as two one‑sided documents.  
– When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set  
the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could  
adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service  
repair, or the paper could jam.  
Into the Stack Bypass  
If you are making prints on labels, transparencies, nonstandard paper size stock, or  
envelopes, load the paper stock into the stack bypass.  
– The paper in the stack bypass is fed prior to the paper in the paper drawer.  
– The recommended envelopes are COM10 (#10), MONARCH, DL, ISO‑B5, and ISO‑C5. Using other envelopes  
may affect the quality of the printout.  
– When printing from a computer, make sure to set the correct paper size in the printer driver. (See the PCL  
Driver Guide and the UFR II Driver Guide.)  
– Do not load different size/type paper at the same time.  
– Depending on the type of heavyweight paper you want to load, if you load multiple sheets of heavyweight  
paper into the stack bypass, a paper jam may occur. In this case, load only one sheet of heavyweight paper at  
a time.  
– If you are printing on envelopes, do not allow more than 10 envelopes to accumulate in the output tray.  
Always empty the output tray once 10 envelopes have accumulated.  
– Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.  
– For high‑quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.  
2‑15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
Open the stack bypass.  
3
Load the paper into the stack  
bypass.  
Make sure that the height of the paper stack  
does not exceed the loading limit mark ( ).  
If the paper size you are going to load into  
the stack bypass is different from the paper  
size stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings,  
set Stack Bypass Standard Settings to [Off]  
in Common Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen). (See “Setting Paper Size  
When you use the stack bypass to make  
copies, straighten out curled paper prior to  
use, as shown below.  
2
Adjust the slide guides (A) to  
match the size of the paper.  
Fen  
Curled paper may cause a paper jam.  
– If there is difficulty in straightening out  
curled paper, curl the front edges of the  
paper upward, as shown below.  
If you are feeding large size paper, pull out  
the auxiliary tray (A), and extend the tray  
extension (B).  
2‑16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– To print on the back side of preprinted  
paper, load the preprinted paper face up  
into the stack bypass, as shown in the  
illustration below.  
If you are loading envelopes into  
the stack bypass:  
1
2
Take five envelopes, loosen them as  
shown, and then stack them together.  
Repeat this step five times for each set of  
five envelopes.  
The screen for selecting the paper size  
appears.  
3
Place the envelopes on a clean, level  
surface, and press all the way around the  
envelopes by hand, in the direction of  
the arrows, to remove any curls. Repeat  
this step five times for each set of five  
envelopes.  
– When loading paper into the stack bypass,  
align the paper stack neatly between the  
slide guides. If the paper is not loaded  
correctly, a paper jam may occur.  
– If you are printing on heavyweight paper  
or envelopes using the stack bypass, and  
find that the paper or envelopes are not  
being fed smoothly or evenly through  
the stack bypass, remove the paper or  
envelopes, curl the feeding edges upward  
approximately 1/8" (3 mm), and then  
reload the paper or envelopes. Curling the  
feeding edges enables the rollers to grip  
the paper or envelopes as they are fed into  
the stack bypass.  
– If there are instructions on the paper  
package about which side of the paper to  
load, follow those instructions.  
– When the paper is loaded into the stack  
bypass, the side facing down is the one  
printed on.  
Take particular care to spread the  
envelopes out in the direction that they  
will be fed.  
– If problems, such as poor print quality or  
paper jams occur, try turning the paper  
stack over and reload it.  
– For more information on the print direction  
of preprinted paper (paper which has  
logos or patterns already printed on it), see  
2‑17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Hold down the four corners of the  
envelopes firmly, so that they and the  
sealed or glued portion stay flat.  
5
Load the envelopes, as shown below.  
Feeding  
Direction  
The screen for selecting the paper size  
appears.  
`
– The stack bypass can hold 10 envelopes  
at a time.  
– Envelopes may be creased in the  
printing process.  
– Do not print on the back side of the  
envelopes (the side with the flap (A)).  
– If the envelopes become filled with air,  
flatten them by hand before loading  
them into the stack bypass.  
4
Specify the size and the type of the  
paper you load.  
For details on how to specify the paper size  
The paper size/type setting in the [Stack  
Bypass] setting screen is available if Stack  
Bypass Standard Settings is set to [Off] in  
Common Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen). If Stack Bypass Standard  
Settings is set to [On], copying can be  
performed only for the registered paper size  
and type. (See, “Setting Paper Size and Type,”  
on p. 2‑19.)  
2‑18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Paper Size and Type  
When you place other sizes and/or types of paper, follow this procedure to change the  
settings.  
Setting Paper Type for the Paper Drawers  
This setting enables you to specify the paper type loaded in each paper source.  
Once you specify this information, icons indicating the type of paper loaded in each paper  
source appear on the paper select screen.  
Be sure to correctly set the paper type. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the  
quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could  
jam.  
4
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
3
2‑19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
7
Press [Done] repeatedly until the  
Basic Features screen appears.  
The registered paper type information is  
displayed through the use of icons on the  
paper select screen, as shown below.  
Select the paper source in which you want  
to register the paper type.  
The numbers on the screen represent the  
following paper sources:  
Paper Drawer 1  
Paper Drawer 2  
Select the desired paper type loaded in  
the paper source.  
Press [OK].  
Make sure that the registered paper type  
setting is the same paper type that is  
loaded in the paper source.  
2‑20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Paper Size and Type for the Stack Bypass  
You can set the paper size and type that the stack bypass uses beforehand. This setting is  
useful if you always load the same paper size and type into the stack bypass.  
– When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set  
the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could  
adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service  
repair, or the paper could jam.  
– If you are using the stack bypass as a paper source for the Copy function, you must select the stack bypass  
when specifying the Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS setting. (See “Automatic Paper Selection/Automatic  
Drawer Switching,” on p. 2‑25.)  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
4
5
3
Press [On].  
Press [Store].  
Press [] until [Stack Bypass Standard  
6
Select the desired paper size.  
Settings] appears.  
2‑21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If you want to select a standard  
If you want to select a  
paper size:  
nonstandard paper size:  
1
1
Select the desired paper size.  
Press [Next].  
2
To select an A or B series paper size, press  
[A/B‑size].  
2
Press [X] to specify the horizontal axis  
of the paper, then enter a value using  
the numeric keys on the touch panel  
display.  
Press [Y] to specify the vertical axis of  
the paper, then enter a value using  
the numeric keys on the touch panel  
display.  
Select the desired paper type.  
Press [OK].  
Press [OK].  
– When printing on special types of  
paper, such as heavyweight paper or  
transparencies, be sure to correctly  
set the paper type, especially if you  
are using heavyweight paper. If the  
type of paper is not set correctly, it  
could adversely affect the quality of  
the image. Moreover, the fixing unit  
may become dirty and require a service  
repair, or the paper could jam.  
– If you select [Transparency] or [Labels],  
make sure that you do not specify any  
finishing modes (Collate, or Group).  
– [Transparency] can be selected only if  
[LTR] is selected as the paper size.  
– If you make a mistake when entering  
values, press [C] on the touch panel  
display, then enter the correct values.  
– You can enter only 2, 4, 8 or 16 as the  
denominator.  
– The value entered in inches is converted  
to millimeters by the machine each time  
it is entered. Thus, there may be a slight  
difference between the value calculated  
and the actual value entered.  
– To enter values in millimeters, press  
[mm].  
– When entering the value in millimeters,  
you can also use  
(numeric keys),  
and (Clear) to clear your entry.  
2‑22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– When entering the value in millimeters,  
you can also change the value by  
pressing [‑] or [+] in increments of  
1.0 mm, even if you have entered the  
value.  
If you want to select an envelope  
size:  
1
– If you enter a value outside the setting  
range, [OK] is grayed out and cannot be  
selected. Enter an appropriate value.  
– You can use values for [X] between 5  
7/8" (148 mm) and 17" (432 mm), and  
for [Y] between 3 3/4" (95 mm) and 11  
11/16" (297 mm).  
3
4
2
Select the envelope type.  
Press [OK].  
– If the envelope type is not selected  
correctly, a paper jam may occur.  
– If you select [Envelope], you cannot use  
the 12‑Sided, 22‑Sided, Book2‑  
Sided, 2‑page Separation, or Image  
Combination mode.  
Select the desired paper type.  
Press [OK].  
3
– When printing on special types of paper,  
such as heavyweight paper, be sure to  
correctly set the paper type, especially  
if you are using heavyweight paper. If  
the type of paper is not set correctly,  
it could adversely affect the quality of  
the image. Moreover, the fixing unit  
may become dirty and require a service  
repair, or the paper could jam.  
[Transparency] can be selected only if  
[LTR] is selected as the paper size.  
– If you select [Irreg. Size], you cannot use  
the 12‑Sided, 22‑Sided, or Book2‑  
Sided mode.  
2‑23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
8
Press [Done] repeatedly until the  
Basic Features screen appears.  
2‑24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful Functions  
You can use the following useful functions.  
Automatic Paper Selection/Automatic Drawer Switching  
You can set which paper sources can be used for Automatic Paper Selection (APS) and  
Automatic Drawer Switching (ADS). This setting can be made independently for all the  
different functions of the machine, and is especially useful when you want to use different  
paper sources for different purposes.  
– Paper sources set to [On] are used for the following functions:  
– APS: The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper size (paper source) based on the original’s  
size and copy ratio settings (when making a copy), or the set ratio of the image (when receiving a fax).  
– ADS: If a paper source runs out of paper during a continuous print job, the machine automatically selects  
another paper source with the same paper size, and begins feeding paper from that paper source.  
3
4
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
Press [] until [Drawer Eligibility For APS/  
ADS] appears.  
2‑25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
7
Press [Done] repeatedly until the  
Basic Features screen appears.  
Select [Copy], [Printer], [Receive], or  
[Other].  
Select [On] or [Off] for the stack bypass  
and the other paper sources.  
Details of each item are shown below.  
[On]: Makes the paper source eligible for  
APS/ADS.  
[Off]: Makes the paper source ineligible for  
APS/ADS.  
The numbers on the screen represent the  
following paper sources:  
Stack Bypass  
Paper Drawer 1  
Paper Drawer 2  
Press [OK].  
– Regardless of the stack bypass setting,  
you cannot select [Off] for all of the paper  
sources at the same time. At least one of  
the paper sources, besides the stack bypass  
must be set to [On].  
– If you selected [Printer] in step 5, the Stack  
Bypass icon ( ) will not be displayed on  
the paper select screen in step 6.  
2‑26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Supply Indicator  
The paper supply indicator (A) shows whether paper is loaded in each paper drawer.  
appears on the Paper Select screen when paper is loaded in a paper drawer.  
on the screen that appears when paper in a paper drawer has run out during printing. (See,  
Basic Copying Method,on p. 3‑2.)  
blinks  
The Paper Select Screen  
A
The Screen When Paper Has Run Out  
2‑27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority  
You can set the priority of print speed or print quality for each drawer.  
5
6
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
Set the priority of copy speed or copy  
quality for each cassette.  
Press [OK].  
Press [Done] repeatedly until the  
Basic Features screen appears.  
3
4
Press [] until [Paper Feed Method  
Switch] appears.  
2‑28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading Preprinted Paper  
Use this chart when printing on preprinted paper (i.e., paper with logos).  
– Do not load the following types of paper into the paper drawers, as this may cause paper jams:  
– Paper on which color images have been copied (do not print on the reverse side either)  
– If you want to print on the back side of preprinted paper, place the side you want to print on:  
– Face up when using a paper drawer  
– Face down when using the stack bypass  
2‑29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2‑30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Copying Method  
Follow this procedure to make a copy.  
Enter the Copy Mode  
Place Your Originals  
Place the original on the platen glass  
or load it in the feeder.  
For originals you can copy, see “Original Requirements,”  
on p. 2‑2.  
Press  
(COPY).  
The COPY indicator lights up and the machine enters the  
copy standby mode.  
You want to adjust the image quality,  
density and copy ratio:  
See “Scan Settings,” on p. 3‑10.  
3‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Enter the Copy Quantity  
Start Copying  
Use  
(numeric keys) to enter the  
Press (Start).  
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
You enter a wrong number:  
You want to cancel copying:  
Press (Clear), and enter a new number.  
Press (Stop).  
3‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Selection  
You can manually specify a paper size or set the machine to automatically select the  
paper size for you.  
– If you are copying an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges onto the same size paper  
at a copy ratio of 100%, the periphery of the original image may be cut off slightly on the copy. For more  
information on how much may be cut off, see “Scanning Area,” on p. 2‑4.  
– If you select [Envelope], [Transparency], or [Labels], make sure that you do not specify any Finishing modes  
(Collate or Group).  
– If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [On],  
and the paper size/type have been stored, the selected paper size/type are displayed on the screen. (See  
Automatic Paper Selection  
The machine automatically selects the copy paper size.  
– The Automatic Paper Selection mode is available only if the originals are fed from the feeder.  
– The Automatic Paper Selection mode cannot be used with the Auto Zoom or Image Combination mode.  
– You cannot use the Automatic Paper Selection mode when copying the following types of originals. Copy  
these originals using the Manual Paper Selection mode.  
– Nonstandard size originals  
– Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies  
– Originals with an extremely dark background  
– STMT or STMTR originals that are placed on the platen glass  
– If Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [Off]  
for a particular paper source, you cannot make copies on paper loaded in that paper source in the Automatic  
Paper Selection mode. (See “Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS,” p. 12‑7.)  
3‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
2
3
Press  
(COPY).  
Place your originals.  
4
5
Press [Auto].  
Press [Done].  
When the feeder is closed, the paper source  
holding that paper size is highlighted along  
with [Auto].  
Press (Start).  
3‑5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Paper Selection  
You can make copies after manually selecting the paper size and type of paper loaded in  
the paper sources.  
You can copy an image onto envelopes, such as your company logo. Envelopes can be loaded into the stack  
bypass.  
4
1
2
Press  
(COPY).  
Place your originals.  
If you want to set the size/type for the paper  
to be fed from the stack bypass, proceed to  
step 5.  
If you want to set the size/type for the paper  
loaded in a paper drawer, proceed to step 3.  
Select the desired paper size.  
Proceed to step 7.  
3
– The paper sizes/types loaded in each paper  
drawer are indicated by icons on the touch  
panel display.  
– Icons indicating the type of paper loaded  
in each paper drawer can be displayed  
on paper select screens, if you store that  
information in the machine beforehand.  
(See chapter 3, “Copying,” in the Reference  
Guide.)  
indicates that the paper is loaded  
vertically, and indicates that the paper is  
loaded horizontally. The suffix <R> (such as  
in LTRR), used in paper size designations,  
indicates that the paper is loaded in  
a paper drawer or the stack bypass  
horizontally.  
When the feeder is closed, the paper source  
holding that paper size is highlighted along  
with [Auto].  
3‑6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
5
For the stack bypass setting, load  
the paper into the stack bypass.  
Select the desired paper type.  
Press [OK].  
– When printing on special types of paper,  
such as heavy paper or transparencies,  
be sure to correctly set the paper type,  
especially if you are using heavy paper.  
If the type of paper is not set correctly,  
it could adversely affect the quality of  
the image. Moreover, the fixing unit  
may become dirty and require a service  
repair, or the paper could jam.  
– If you select [Transparency] or [Labels],  
make sure that you do not specify any  
Finishing modes (Collate or Group).  
– [Transparency] can be selected only if  
[LTR] is selected as the paper size.  
– [3‑hole punch] can be selected only if  
[LTR] or [LTRR] is selected as the paper  
size.  
The paper size/type setting in the [Stack  
Bypass] setting screen is available if Stack  
Bypass Standard Settings is set to [Off] in  
Common Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen). If Stack Bypass Standard  
Settings is set to [On], copying can be  
performed only for the registered paper  
size and type. (See “Stack Bypass Standard  
Settings,” on p. 12‑8.)  
If you want to select a standard  
paper size:  
1
If you want to select a  
nonstandard paper size:  
1
Select the desired paper size.  
Press [Next].  
To select an A or B series paper size, press  
[A/B‑size].  
3‑7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
4
Press [X] to specify the horizontal axis  
of the paper, then enter a value.  
Press [Y] to specify the vertical axis of  
the paper, then enter a value.  
Press [OK].  
Select the desired paper type.  
Press [OK].  
– When printing on special types of paper,  
such as heavy paper, be sure to correctly  
set the paper type, especially if you are  
using heavy paper. If the type of paper  
is not set correctly, it could adversely  
affect the quality of the image.  
Moreover, the fixing unit may become  
dirty and require a service repair, or the  
paper could jam.  
– If you select [Irreg. Size] for copying, you  
cannot use the Rotate Collate, Rotate  
Group, 1 2‑Sided, 2 2‑Sided, Book  
2‑Sided, 2‑Page Separation, Image  
Combination mode.  
– If you make a mistake when entering  
values, press [C] on the touch panel  
display, then enter the correct values.  
– To enter values in millimeters, press  
[mm].  
– If you enter values outside the setting  
range, [OK] is grayed out and cannot be  
selected. Enter an appropriate value.  
– You can adjust values for [X] between 5  
7/8" and 17", and for [Y] between 3 3/4"  
and 11 11/16".  
If you want to select an envelope  
3
size:  
1
3‑8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Select the desired envelope type.  
Press [OK].  
– If the envelope type is not selected  
correctly, a paper jam will occur.  
– If an envelope size is selected, the  
Finishing, 1 2‑Sided, 2 2‑Sided,  
Book 2‑Sided, 2‑Page Separation, or  
Image Combination mode cannot be  
specified.  
3
6
7
Press (Start).  
To cancel all settings and return the machine  
to the Standard mode, press (Reset).  
3‑9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scan Settings  
You can set the desired copy exposure and select the original type before scanning  
the original.  
Manual Exposure Adjustment  
You can manually adjust the copy exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.  
Original Type Selection  
The machine is capable of processing and producing copies according to the type of  
the original. You can manually select the original type so that the machine reproduces  
copies as faithful as possible to the original. The following three original type modes are  
available:  
Text Mode  
Text/Photo Mode  
Photo Mode  
– Text Mode  
This mode is best suited for making copies of text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn  
originals can also be copied clearly.  
– Text/Photo Mode  
This mode is best suited for making copies of originals containing both text and  
images/photos, such as magazines or catalogues.  
– Photo Mode  
This mode is best suited for making copies from photos printed on photographic  
paper, or making copies of images printed with halftone dots (i.e., printed photos).  
Automatic Exposure Adjustment  
This mode enables you to set the machine to automatically adjust the exposure to the  
level best suited to the quality of the original.  
Exposure Adjustment during Printing  
You can change the copy exposure while the machine is printing.  
3‑10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Original Type Selection  
– Combinations of these three modes (Text, Text/Photo, and Photo) cannot be selected at the same time. If you  
select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.  
– If you make copies of an original containing halftones, such as a printed photograph, using the Photo mode,  
the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen the moiré effect by  
using the Sharpness mode. (See chapter 3, “Copying,” in the Reference Guide.)  
– If you select the Automatic Exposure Adjustment mode, the original type mode is grayed out and fixed to  
Text mode. If you select the Text/Photo or Photo mode, the exposure can only be adjusted manually.  
– If the original is a transparency, select the original type, then adjust the exposure to the most appropriate  
level for the original.  
1
2
3
Press  
(COPY).  
5
Press (Start).  
Place your originals.  
To cancel all settings and return the machine  
to the Standard mode, press (Reset).  
Press  
.
4
Select the original type.  
3‑11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Exposure  
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original either automatically  
or manually.  
Adjusting Automatically  
1
2
3
Press  
(COPY).  
Place your originals.  
The machine automatically adjusts the copy  
exposure to the level best suited to the  
quality of the original.  
An automatic copy exposure adjustment  
may not work with transparencies. In this  
case, adjust the copy exposure manually by  
pressing [Light] or [Dark].  
4
Press (Start).  
To cancel all settings and return the machine  
to the Standard mode, press (Reset).  
3‑12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting Manually  
1
2
3
Press  
(COPY).  
Place your originals.  
Press [Light] or [Dark].  
Press [Light] to move the indicator to the  
left to make the exposure lighter, or press  
[Dark] to move it to the right to make the  
exposure darker.  
4
Press (Start).  
To cancel all settings and return the machine  
to the Standard mode, press (Reset).  
3‑13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copy Ratio  
You can set the machine to adjust the copy ratio automatically, or you can specify the copy  
ratio manually.  
The following three types of copy ratio settings are available.  
To set the copy ratio to 100%, press [Direct].  
Preset Zoom  
The machine offers you a variety of preset copy ratios to reduce or enlarge standard size  
originals to another standard paper size.  
Zoom by Percentage  
You can reduce or enlarge originals by any copy ratio in 1% increments. The copy ratios  
for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes are the same.  
Auto Zoom  
You can set the machine to automatically select the appropriate copy ratio based on the  
size of the original and the selected copy paper. The copy ratios for the horizontal (X) and  
vertical (Y) axes are the same.  
Original  
Copy  
3‑14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preset Zoom  
The machine offers you a variety of preset copy ratios to reduce or enlarge standard size  
originals to another standard paper size.  
Reduction  
The available preset copy ratios for reducing originals are:  
– LGL LTR (78%)  
– 11" x 17" LGL (73%)  
– 11" x 17" LTR (64%)  
– MIN. (50%)  
Enlargement  
The available preset copy ratios for enlarging originals are:  
– MAX. (200%)  
– LTR 11" x 17" (129%)  
– LGL 11" x 17" (121%)  
– Place the originals horizontally in the following cases:  
– If you are enlarging LTR originals to 11" x 17"  
– If you are enlarging STMT originals to 11" x 17"  
– Placing an original horizontally means setting the original with the longer side sideways.  
– If you are reducing 11" x 17" originals to LTR with Auto Orientation in Copy Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen) set to [Off], load LTRR paper into a paper drawer or the stack bypass.  
4
1
2
3
Press  
(COPY).  
Place your originals.  
To reduce the original image, select  
a preset reduction ratio. To enlarge  
the original image, select a preset  
enlargement ratio.  
Following your selection, press [Done].  
3‑15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
6
Select the paper size.  
– If you set [Auto] for [Paper Select], the  
machine selects the paper best suitable to  
the selected ratio.  
– If you copy highly transparent originals,  
such as transparencies, the correct paper  
size may not be selected.  
Press (Start).  
– To return the copy ratio to 100%, press  
[Direct].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
Zoom by Percentage  
You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio, in 1% increments. The available copy  
ratios are from 50% to 200%. The same copy ratio is used for the horizontal (X) and vertical  
(Y) axes.  
1
2
3
Press  
(COPY).  
Place your originals.  
3‑16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
5
6
Select the paper size.  
– If you set [Auto] for [Paper Select], the  
machine selects the paper best suitable to  
the selected ratio.  
– If you copy highly transparent originals,  
such as transparencies, the correct paper  
size may not be selected.  
Press [‑] or [+] to set a copy ratio.  
Press [Done].  
You can also use  
enter values, and (Clear) to clear your  
entries.  
You can change the value by pressing [‑]  
or [+], even if you have entered the value  
(numeric keys) to  
Press (Start).  
– To return the copy ratio to 100%, press  
[Direct].  
using  
(numeric keys).  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
If you enter a value outside the setting  
range, a message prompting you to enter an  
appropriate value appears on the screen.  
Auto Zoom  
You can set the machine to automatically select the appropriate copy ratio based on  
the size of the original and the selected copy paper. The same copy ratio is used for the  
horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes. The available copy ratios are from 50% to 200%.  
– You cannot use the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen with the Automatic Paper Selection mode.  
– You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, using the Auto setting on the Copy  
Ratio screen. Use the Preset Zoom or Zoom by Percentage mode instead.  
– To use the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen, your originals must conform to one of the standard paper  
sizes:  
– 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT or STMTR (You can only place an STMTR original on the platen glass.)  
1
2
Press  
(COPY).  
3
Place your originals.  
3‑17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
7
Press (Start).  
– To return the copy ratio to 100%, press  
[Direct].  
– To cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio],  
then [Auto].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
Select the desired paper size.  
Press [Done].  
Make sure that you select a paper size other  
than [Auto]. If you do not select a paper size,  
the copy ratio is automatically set to match  
the size of the paper loaded in Paper Drawer  
1.  
5
6
Press [Auto].  
Press [Done].  
3‑18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reserved Copy  
You can set the machine to scan originals even while it is printing or waiting to  
process a job.  
– You can reserve up to five copy jobs, including the current job.  
– You can set different copy modes and paper sources for each reserved job.  
Reserving Copy Jobs  
Reserved printing can be specified in the following cases:  
While the Machine Is Waiting  
You can specify copy settings or scan originals while the machine is in the waiting state,  
such as when after a paper jam is cleared. Copying automatically begins when the machine  
is ready. The message <Reservation copies can be made.> appears on the touch panel  
display when the machine is able to process reserved copying.  
While the Machine Is Printing  
You can specify copy settings for a new job while the machine is printing. Copying of the  
new job automatically begins when the current job is complete.  
You can specify reserved copying while the machine is in the waiting state in the following cases:  
– After a paper jam is cleared  
– After a cover on the main unit is opened and closed  
3‑19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
4
Press (Start).  
If you specify a reserved copy job while the  
machine is in the waiting state, copying  
automatically begins when the machine is  
ready.  
If you specify a reserved copy job while the  
machine is printing, copying of the new job  
automatically begins when the current job is  
complete. If the following screen is displayed,  
press [OK], then try reserving the job again  
after the current job is complete.  
Press [Done] on the pop‑up screen that  
appears while the machine is printing.  
If the job displayed on the touch panel  
display is from a function other than the Copy  
function, press [Done], then press  
(COPY)  
to display the Copy Basic Features screen.  
This part of the procedure is not necessary if  
the machine is in the waiting state.  
2
3
Place your originals.  
Set the desired copy modes and  
paper source.  
To cancel a previously set copy mode, press  
(Reset).  
3‑20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Collate Copy  
The Finishing modes can be selected to collate the copies in various ways, either by  
pages or copy sets.  
The Finishing modes cannot be set if [Envelope], [Transparency], or [Labels] is selected as the paper type.  
If the Collate Mode Is Set:  
The copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order. The output is as  
follows:  
Originals  
Set 1  
Set 2  
Set 3  
Three Copies  
of Each Page  
Collated in  
Page Order  
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
2
3
2
3
2
3
4
4
4
If the Group Mode Is Set:  
All copies of the same original page are grouped together. The output is as follows:  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Group 3  
Group 4  
Originals  
Three Copies  
of Each Page  
Grouped by  
Page  
2
2
2
4
4
4
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
3
3
3
If No Finisher Mode Is Set:  
If the Collate and Group modes are not set, copies are output as follows:  
Originals  
Copies  
1
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
3‑21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If the Rotate Mode Is Set:  
If the copies are of the same size, the sheets are automatically collated into sets arranged in  
page order, and are output in alternating directions as follows:  
1
1
1
2
3
4
Page Order (Collate)  
1
2
3
Press  
(COPY).  
5
Place your originals.  
4
Press [Collate].  
Press [OK].  
If you want to rotate the output sheet,  
press [Rotate] and proceed to step 5.  
Otherwise, press [OK] and skip to step 7.  
3‑22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
7
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display. Press (Start) once for  
each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Select [A4], [A4R], [B5], [B5R], [LTR], or  
– To cancel this setting, press [Finishing],  
then press [Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
[LTRR].  
Press [OK].  
– [Rotate] can be selected only in the  
following cases:  
– If the available paper size is selected  
manually  
– If the available paper size is loaded  
in both the horizontal and vertical  
directions  
– The selected paper source must have  
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in  
Common Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen) set to [On]. (See  
p. 12‑7.)  
– When you have selected Automatic Paper  
Selection for the Rotate mode, make sure  
to select a paper size which can be rotated.  
Otherwise, output will not be rotated.  
– If there is no paper which can be rotated,  
output will be collated.  
Same Page (Group)  
1
2
Press  
(COPY).  
3
Place your originals.  
3‑23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
5
6
Press [Group].  
Select [A4], [A4R], [B5], [B5R], [LTR], or  
Press [OK].  
[LTRR].  
If you want to rotate the output sheet,  
press [Rotate] and proceed to step 5.  
Otherwise, press [OK] and skip to step 7.  
Press [OK].  
– [Rotate] can be selected only in the  
following cases:  
– If the available paper size is selected  
manually  
– If the available paper size is loaded  
in both the horizontal and vertical  
directions  
– The selected paper source must have  
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in  
Common Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen) set to [On]. (See  
p. 12‑7.)  
– When you have selected Automatic Paper  
Selection for the Rotate mode, make sure  
to select a paper size which can be rotated.  
Otherwise, output will not be rotated.  
– If there is no paper which can be rotated,  
output will be collated.  
7
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display. Press (Start) once for  
each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
– To cancel this setting, press [Finishing],  
then press [Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
3‑24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Two-Sided Copying  
This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided  
originals, or make one-sided copies from two-sided originals.  
– You may not be able to make two‑sided copies on some types of paper, depending on the paper.  
– If you are copying in the 2‑Sided mode, align the top edge of the original with the back edge of the platen  
glass (by the arrow in the top left corner), or with the back edge of the feeder.  
– The 2‑Sided mode you have selected is displayed above [2‑Sided] on the Copy Basic Features screen.  
– Paper used to make two‑sided copies must conform to the following specifications:  
– Paper size: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC, STMTR (envelopes cannot be used for two‑sided copying)  
– Paper weight: 17 to 24 lb bond (64 to 90 g/m2)  
– If you select [Irreg. Size] for copying, you cannot use the 1 2‑Sided, 2 2‑Sided, Book 2‑Sided, or 2‑page  
Separation mode. (See chapter 3, “Copying,” in the Reference Guide.)  
– If you select [Envelope] for copying, you cannot use 1 2‑Sided, 2 2‑Sided, Book 2‑Sided, 2‑page  
Separation mode. (See chapter 3, “Copying,” in the Reference Guide.)  
Making Two-Sided Copies from One-Sided Originals (1 2-Sided)  
This feature enables you to make two‑sided copies from one‑sided originals.  
Copy  
Originals  
Making Two-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 2-Sided)  
This feature enables you to make two‑sided copies from two‑sided originals. If the originals  
are placed in the feeder, they are automatically turned over to make two‑sided copies.  
Original  
Copy  
3‑25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Making One-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 1-Sided)  
This feature automatically turns over two‑sided originals placed in the feeder to make one‑  
sided copies on different sheets of paper.  
Original  
Copies  
Making Two-Sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided)  
This feature enables you to make two‑sided copies from facing pages, or from the front and  
back sides of a page in bound originals, such as books and magazines.  
– Place your original on the platen glass. The Book to 2‑Sided mode cannot be used when the original is placed  
in the feeder.  
– Left/Right Two‑sided  
This setting makes two‑sided copies from facing pages.  
Copies  
Original  
1
2
1
1
2
– Front/Back Two‑sided  
This setting makes two‑sided copies from the front and back sides of a page.  
Copies  
Original  
1
2
2
1
3‑26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 to 2-Sided  
This feature enables you to make two‑sided copies from one‑sided originals.  
– The 1 2‑Sided mode cannot be used with the Two‑page Separation or Image Combination mode.  
– If there are an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy is left blank.  
– If the 1 2‑Sided mode is used with the Different Size Originals mode, the copies of different size originals  
will be printed as one‑sided copies on paper of their respective sizes. If you want to make two‑sided copies  
with different size originals, you must select the paper size beforehand. (See “Paper Selection,” on p. 3‑4.)  
To set the orientation of the two-  
1
2
3
Press  
(COPY).  
sided copies:  
1
Place your originals.  
2
4
Select the type of two‑sided  
orientation.  
Details of each item are shown below.  
[Book Type]: The front and back sides  
of the copy will have the same top‑  
bottom orientation.  
[Calendar Type]: The front and back  
sides of the copy will have opposite  
top‑bottom orientations.  
Press [Done].  
3‑27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
6
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display. Press (Start) once for  
each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
– To cancel this setting, press [2‑Sided], then  
press [Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
2 to 2-Sided  
This feature enables you to make two‑sided copies from two‑sided originals. If a two‑sided  
original is placed in the feeder, it is automatically turned over so that both sides of the  
original are copied on the front and back sides of a copy sheet.  
The 2 2‑Sided mode cannot be used with the Two‑page Separation or Image Combination mode.  
To set the orientation of the  
1
2
3
Press  
(COPY).  
originals and the copies:  
1
Place your originals.  
4
3‑28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
5
6
Select the type of two‑sided orientation  
for the originals and the copies.  
Details of each item are shown below.  
Original  
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display. Press (Start) once for  
each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
[Book Type]: The front and back sides of  
the original have the same top‑bottom  
orientation.  
[Calendar Type]: The front and back  
sides of the original have opposite top‑  
bottom orientations.  
Copy  
– To cancel this setting, press [2‑Sided], then  
press [Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
[Book Type]: The front and back sides  
of the copy will have the same top‑  
bottom orientation.  
[Calendar Type]: The front and back  
sides of the copy will have opposite  
top‑bottom orientations.  
Press [Done].  
2 to 1-Sided  
This feature automatically turns over two‑sided originals placed in the feeder to make one‑  
sided copies on different sheets of paper.  
– The 2 1‑Sided mode cannot be used with the 2‑page Separation or Image Combination mode.  
– Make sure to place originals, such as LTRR, horizontally. If these originals are placed vertically, the back side of  
the copy is printed upside down.  
3
1
2
Press  
(COPY).  
Place your originals into the  
feeder.  
3‑29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
5
6
To set the orientation of the  
Press (Start).  
originals :  
1
– To cancel this setting, press [2‑Sided], then  
press [Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
2
Select the orientation of the originals.  
Details of each item are shown below.  
[Book Type]: The front and back sides of  
the original have the same top‑bottom  
orientation.  
[Calendar Type]: The front and back  
sides of the original have opposite top‑  
bottom orientations.  
Press [Done].  
3‑30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Book to 2-Sided  
This feature enables you to make two‑sided copies from facing pages, or from the front and  
back sides of a page in bound originals, such as books and magazines.  
– The Book 2‑Sided mode cannot be used with the 2‑page Separation, Image Combination, Binding Erase, or  
Different Size Originals mode.  
– Only LTR paper can be used for Book 2‑Sided copying.  
– If you select [Front/Back Two‑sided], the front side of the first two‑sided page and the back side of the last  
two‑sided page are left blank.  
– Place your original on the platen glass. The Book 2‑Sided mode cannot be used when the original is placed  
in the feeder.  
1
2
Press  
(COPY).  
4
5
Place your original on the platen  
glass.  
3
Press [Book 2‑Sided].  
Press [Next].  
To make copies in the correct page order,  
begin copying from the first open page of the  
book or bound original.  
Place your original face down, making sure  
that its top edge is aligned with the back  
edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the  
top left corner).  
Select the desired type of two‑sided  
layout.  
Details of each item are shown below.  
[Left/Right 2‑sided] : The facing pages of a  
book or bound original are copied on the  
front and back sides of a single sheet of  
paper.  
[Front/Back 2‑sided]: The front and back  
sides of the left page, or the front and  
back sides of the right page, are copied on  
the front and back sides of a single sheet  
of paper.  
Press [OK].  
3‑31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
7
Press (Start).  
To copy the next two facing pages, turn the  
page of the original. Place your original on  
the platen glass, then press (Start).  
– To cancel this setting, press [2‑Sided], then  
press [Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
3‑32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Confirming Settings  
Copy mode settings that you have specified, including those that are set from the  
Special Features screen, are all grouped together onto one screen so you can easily  
check them.  
1
2
Check the settings.  
Press [Done].  
A right triangle () on a copy mode setting  
key indicates that more setting screens are  
available by pressing the key.  
3‑33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing/Canceling Selected Settings  
You can use the Setting Confirmation screen to change or cancel selected copy modes.  
1
2
3
Change or cancel the selected copy  
mode (for example, Sharpness).  
To change a copy mode:  
1
Perform the same steps used for setting  
the mode. Change the setting as you  
desire.  
Press [OK].  
To cancel a copy mode:  
Press the key of the copy mode to be  
changed or canceled.  
1
– A right triangle () on a copy mode setting  
key indicates that more setting screens are  
available by pressing the key.  
– If you select a copy mode setting key  
without a right triangle () and then  
press [Done], the selected copy mode is  
canceled.  
4
3‑34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Canceling Copy Jobs  
You can cancel a job using the touch panel display or System Monitor screen, or by  
pressing (Stop).  
Using the Touch Panel Display  
You can cancel a copy job by pressing [Cancel], while the job is being copy.  
1
Press [Cancel] on the pop‑up screen that  
appears while the machine is scanning,  
printing, or waiting to print.  
If you cancel a copy job during scanning,  
make sure to remove the original for that job.  
3‑35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the System Monitor Screen  
You can cancel a copy job while it is waiting to be processed or during printing.  
1
– If the job that you want to cancel is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired job.  
– You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel  
them all at once. You may only select and  
cancel one job at a time.  
5
6
2
3
4
The message <Canceling...> appears for  
approximately two seconds on the touch  
panel display.  
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No  
Good) on the Log screen.  
Press [Done].  
Select the copy job that you want to  
cancel.  
Press [Cancel].  
3‑36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking Copy Jobs  
System monitor enables you to monitor the status of the copy jobs currently being  
processed.  
Checking the Status of Copy Jobs  
1
2
3
4
Select the job whose detailed information  
you want to check.  
Press [Details].  
If the job that you want to check is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired job.  
5
6
Check the details of the selected  
job.  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Copy Basic Features screen  
appears.  
3‑37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3‑38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending  
4 Documents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Sending Method  
Follow this procedure to send faxes.  
Enter the Send Mode  
Place Your Originals  
Place the original on the platen glass  
or load it in the feeder.  
Press  
(SEND).  
The Send Basic Features screen appears.  
For documents you can send, see “Original  
Requirements,” on p. 2‑2.  
For sending jobs to e-mail, I-fax, or file server addresses, see “Sending an E-Mail  
Only),on p. 4-11. (Sending documents via e-mail, I-fax, or sending to a file server is  
available only for the imageCLASS MF7480.)  
For advanced sending features, see Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,in the  
Reference Guide.  
4‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specify the Destination  
Send the Document  
Specify the fax number using  
Press (Start).  
(numeric keys).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the  
instructions on the touch panel display, then press  
(Start) once for each original. When scanning is  
complete, press [Done].  
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent to the  
specified destination when scanning is complete.  
You can also specify the fax number using the Address  
Book, one‑touch buttons, or favorites buttons. (See  
You want to cancel sending:  
Press [Cancel] on the pop‑up screen that  
appears while the machine is scanning, or  
press (Stop).  
To cancel a job while it is being sent or  
waiting to be sent, see “Canceling TX  
Jobs,” on p. 4‑90.  
You enter a wrong number when  
specifying a fax number:  
Press (Clear) to clear your entry.  
You want to specify scan settings:  
Press [Scan Settings], then select a scan  
setting from the pop‑up menu. (See “Scan  
Settings,” on p. 4‑16.)  
4‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending an E-Mail Message (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)  
You can scan an original and send it as an attached file in an e‑mail message. You can add  
the document’s name, a subject line, message body text, reply‑to address, and e‑mail  
priority. The scanned document can be sent as a JPEG, TIFF, or PDF file.  
.
5
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
Place your originals.  
Enter the name of the document (up to 24  
characters) that you want to send.  
Press [OK].  
– You can also use  
(numeric keys) to  
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your  
entry.  
Specify the e‑mail address.  
Press [Send Settings].  
– When you are sending documents, each  
page is sent as a separate image attached  
to an e‑mail message, and the extension  
of the document matches the file format  
that you select for sending. The file name  
prefix of the image attached to the e‑mail  
message is assigned as follows:  
– If you set the document’s name:  
The file name prefix is generated by the  
document’s name, transaction number,  
and four digits that signify the page  
number of the image.  
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
4
Example: document name_1004_0001.tif  
– If you do not set the document’s name:  
The file name prefix is generated by the  
transaction number and four digits that  
signify the page number of the image.  
Example: 1004_0001.tif  
4‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
– If you set the file format to [TIFF], [PDF],  
or [PDF (Compact)] while both Divide  
into Pages and Divided TX over Max.Data  
Size are set to [Off], the four‑digit number  
which indicates the page number is fixed  
to <0001>.  
8
9
6
7
Enter the message body text (up to 140  
characters).  
Press [OK].  
– A hard return is counted as one character.  
– You can also use  
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your  
entry.  
(numeric keys) to  
Enter the subject (up to 40 characters) of  
the e‑mail message.  
Press [OK].  
10  
– You can also use  
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your  
entry.  
(numeric keys) to  
– If you do not enter a subject, the default  
subject set in E‑mail/I‑Fax Settings is used.  
(See “E‑mail/I‑Fax Settings,” on p. 12‑38.)  
4‑5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
12  
13  
Press the E‑mail Priority drop‑down list.  
Select the reply‑to address.  
Press [OK].  
Select a priority for your e‑mail message.  
Press [Done].  
– You need to store reply‑to addresses in the  
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/  
– If the desired reply‑to address is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired reply‑to address.  
14  
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to  
display the individual keys for each letter or  
number. You can select a letter or number  
to restrict the displayed range of entries.  
Press [All] to return to the full address list.  
– You can also specify a fax number as the  
reply‑to address.  
– You cannot select multiple destinations at  
the same time.  
– To cancel a selected reply‑to address, press  
[Reply‑to], then [Cancel].  
– To view the detailed information of a  
selected reply‑to address, select the  
address, then press [Details].  
4‑6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Select a file format for sending your  
document.  
If you want to separate multiple images  
and send them as separate files, each of  
which consists of only one page, press  
[Divide into Pages].  
If you want to send multiple images as a  
single file without dividing them, do not  
press [Divide into Pages].  
Press [Done].  
For instructions on setting the file format,  
MF7480 Only),” on p. 4‑14.  
16  
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
4‑7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending an I-Fax (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)  
You can scan an original, and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I‑fax. An I‑fax  
can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes through the Internet. You can add the  
document’s name, a subject line, message body text, and reply‑to address.  
The following conditions are always selected:  
– Paper Size: LTR  
This is because the sender does not know whether the recipient’s machine can receive sizes other than LTR.  
Originals larger than LTR are reduced to LTR size.  
– File Format: TIFF  
– Resolution: B&W 200 x 100 dpi or B&W 200 x 200 dpi  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
4
5
Place your originals.  
Specify the I‑fax address.  
Press [Send Settings].  
Enter the name of the document (up to 24  
characters) that you want to send.  
Press [OK].  
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
– You can also use  
(numeric keys) to  
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your  
entry.  
4‑8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
– When you are sending documents, each  
page is sent as a separate TIFF image  
attached to the I‑fax. The file name prefix of  
the image attached to the I‑fax is assigned  
as follows:  
– If you set the document’s name:  
The file name prefix is generated by the  
document’s name, transaction number,  
and four digits that signify the page  
number of the image.  
Example: document name_1004_0001.tif  
– If you do not set the document’s name:  
The file name prefix is generated by the  
transaction number and four digits that  
signify the page number of the image.  
Example: 1004_0001.tif  
– If you do not enter a subject, the default  
subject set in E‑mail/I‑Fax Settings is used.  
(See “E‑mail/I‑Fax Settings,” on p. 12‑38.)  
8
9
6
7
Enter the message body text (up to 140  
characters).  
Press [OK].  
– A hard return is counted as one character.  
– You can also use  
(numeric keys) to  
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your  
entry.  
10  
Enter the subject (up to 40 characters) of  
your I‑fax.  
Press [OK].  
– You can also use  
(numeric keys) to  
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your  
entry.  
4‑9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
Select the reply‑to address.  
Press [OK].  
– You need to store reply‑to addresses in the  
Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/  
– If the desired reply‑to address is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired reply‑to address.  
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to  
display the individual keys for each letter or  
number. You can select a letter or number  
to restrict the displayed range of entries.  
Press [All] to return to the full address list.  
– You can also specify a fax number as the  
reply‑to address.  
– You cannot select multiple destinations at  
the same time.  
– To cancel a selected reply‑to address, press  
[Reply‑to], then [Cancel].  
– To view the detailed information of a  
selected reply‑to address, select the  
address, then press [Details].  
4‑10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Job to a File Server (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)  
You can send a job to any computer that acts as a file server on the network. You can add  
the document’s name and message body text. The scanned document can be sent as a  
JPEG, TIFF, or PDF file.  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
5
Place your originals.  
Enter the name of the document (up to 24  
characters) that you want to send.  
Press [OK].  
– If you use characters such as “,”, “/”, “[”, or  
“]” in the document name, you may not  
be able to send the file to file servers that  
run on operating systems that do not  
recognize such characters.  
Specify the file server’s destination.  
Press [Send Settings].  
– You can also use  
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your  
entry.  
(numeric keys) to  
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
4
4‑11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
– When you are sending documents, each  
page is sent as a separate image and  
stored in a file server. The extension of the  
document matches the file format that you  
select for sending. The file name prefix of  
the image attached to the document you  
are sending is assigned as follows:  
– If you set the document’s name:  
The file name prefix is generated by  
the document’s name, the transaction  
number, and the four digits that signify  
the page number of the image.  
Example: document name_1004_0001.tif  
document name_1004_0001.pdf  
document name_1004_0001.jpg  
– If you do not set the document’s name:  
The file name prefix is generated by the  
transaction number and the four digits  
that signify the page number of the  
image.  
7
Enter the message body text (up to 140  
characters).  
Press [OK].  
– A hard return is counted as one character.  
– You can also use  
(numeric keys) to  
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your  
entry.  
– When you are sending documents to a file  
server, the characters entered in [Message]  
is sent as a text file. However, if you do not  
enter characters in [Message], only the  
image file is sent to the server without a  
text file.  
Example: 1004_0001.tif  
1004_0001.pdf  
1004_0001.jpg  
– If you set the file format to [TIFF], [PDF],  
or [PDF (Compact)] while both Divide  
into Pages and Divided TX over Max.Data  
Size are set to [Off], the four‑digit number  
which indicates the page number is fixed  
to <0001>.  
8
9
6
4‑12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Select a file format for sending your  
document.  
If you want to separate multiple images  
and send them as separate files, each of  
which consists of only one page, press  
[Divide into Pages].  
If you want to send multiple images as a  
single file without dividing them, do not  
press [Divide into Pages].  
Press [Done].  
For instructions on setting the file format,  
MF7480 Only),” on p. 4‑14.  
11  
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
4‑13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the File Format (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)  
You can select [TIFF], [PDF], [JPEG], or [PDF (Compact)] as the file format when sending  
documents to an e‑mail address or a file server.  
When sending multiple documents to an e‑mail address or file server, each page can be  
sent as a separate file.  
Select a file format for sending your  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
document.  
File Formats:  
[TIFF]: Sends the file in the TIFF format.  
This file format is available only when you  
scan the document in the B&W mode.  
[PDF]: Sends the file in the PDF format.  
This file format is available only when you  
scan the document in the B&W mode.  
[JPEG]: Sends the file in the JPEG format.  
This file format is available only when you  
scan the document in the Color mode.  
[PDF(Compact)]: Enables you to send files  
containing text originals or text/photo  
originals using a high compression ratio.  
This file format is available only when you  
scan the document in the Color mode.  
If you select [PDF (Compact)] as the file  
format, it is recommended that you set the  
original type setting to either [Text/Photo]  
or [Text], depending on the image type.  
If you want to separate multiple images  
and send them as separate files, each of  
which consists of only one page, press  
[Divide into Pages].  
Place your originals.  
Specify the destination.  
Press [File Format].  
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
4
If you want to send multiple images as a  
single file without dividing them, do not  
press [Divide into Pages].  
Press [Done].  
– If you select [JPEG] as the file format, Divide  
into Pages is automatically set to [On].  
4‑14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
– If you select [PDF (Compact)] as the file  
format, the Color mode is set to [Color]  
and the resolution is set to [300 x 300 dpi]  
automatically, and the original type setting  
is disabled.  
– The color mode and resolution you can  
set differ depending on the file format  
you select. Follow the instructions on the  
screen.  
– To view a JPEG file, a software application  
that supports the JPEG format is required.  
– To view a TIFF file, a software application  
that supports the TIFF format (such as  
Imaging for Windows) is required.  
– To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe  
Acrobat Reader is required.  
5
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
4‑15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scan Settings  
You can specify the scan settings to match the original you are sending.  
Selecting a Scan Mode  
The machine has three preset scan modes:  
– B&W 200 x 200 dpi, B&W 300 x 300 dpi, and Color 300 x 300 dpi (for the imageCLASS  
MF7480)  
– 200 x 200 dpi (Fine), 200 x 400 dpi (SuperFine), and 400 x 400 dpi (UltraFine) (for the  
imageCLASS MF7470/MF7460)  
Select the desired mode from the preset scan modes according to the type of original  
you are sending.  
– If the destination is a fax number or I‑fax address, the original is always scanned and sent in B&W mode.  
– If you want to use less memory and make the sending time shorter, use a low‑resolution mode.  
– In addition to the scan mode, you can store addresses and other send settings in the favorites buttons. (See  
– For instructions on specifying destinations,  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
– The following combinations of file format  
and preset scan modes are not available.  
If you select them, a message asking for  
your confirmation to change the file format  
appears on the screen when you press  
(Start).  
– [PDF (Compact)] or [JPEG] as the file  
format and [B&W 200 x 200 dpi] or [B&W  
300 x 300 dpi] as the scan mode.  
Place your originals.  
– [TIFF] or [PDF] as the file format and  
[Color 300 x 300 dpi] as the scan mode.  
– [Color 300 x 300 dpi] is not available when  
sending faxes or I‑faxes.  
– To change the Scan mode settings, select  
[Option] from the Scan Settings drop‑down  
list, and adjust the settings.  
Specify the destination.  
Press [Scan Settings].  
Select a scan mode.  
4‑16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan  
Settings], then press [Option], then  
[Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
4‑17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Color Mode (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)  
The following two color modes are available: Color and B&W (black and white).  
Color  
The Color mode always scans in color regardless of whether the original is in color or  
black‑and‑white.  
B&W  
The B&W mode always scans in black‑and‑white regardless of whether the original is in  
color or black‑and‑white.  
– If the destination is a fax number or I‑fax address, the original is always scanned and sent in B&W mode.  
– If you select the Color mode and select JPEG as the file format, you can select 100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi,  
200 x 100 dpi, or 300 x 300 dpi as the resolution.  
– If you select the Color mode and select PDF (Compact) as the file format, 300 x 300 dpi is available as the  
resolution.  
– If a black‑and‑white original is scanned in the Color mode, it is counted as a color scan.  
– If you select the B&W mode, you can select TIFF or PDF as the file format, and 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi,  
200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, or 600 x 600 dpi as the resolution.  
4
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
Place your originals.  
Press [Color] or [B&W].  
Press [OK].  
– If [TIFF] or [PDF] is selected as the file  
format, and you select [Color] as the color  
mode, and then press [OK], a message  
asking for your confirmation to change the  
file format appears on the screen.  
– If [JPEG] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected  
as the file format, and you select [Color]  
as the color mode, and then press [OK],  
a message asking for your confirmation  
to change the file format appears on the  
screen.  
Specify the destination.  
Press [Scan Settings].  
Press [Option].  
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
4‑18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan  
Settings], then press [Option], then  
[Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
4‑19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Document Size  
You can specify the document size before scanning originals whose size you need to  
manually specify, such as transparencies.  
– You cannot select [Auto] when scanning the following types of originals. Specify the size of these documents  
manually.  
– Nonstandard size originals  
– Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies  
– Originals with an extremely dark background  
– STMT or STMTR originals that are placed on the platen glass  
– When using Direct Sending for sending a fax, if you place the originals in the feeder, the Document Size  
Select setting you specified is disabled.  
– If you specify the document size, you cannot use the Stamp or Different Size Originals mode.  
4
5
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
Place your originals.  
Specify the destination.  
Press [Scan Settings].  
Press [Option].  
Select the document size.  
Press [Done].  
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
To select an A or B series paper size, press  
[A/B‑size].  
4‑20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
7
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan  
Settings], then press [Option], then  
[Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
4‑21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resolution  
You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.  
The following combinations of color mode and resolution are available:  
– B&W (TIFF and PDF)  
150 x 150dpi, 200 x 100dpi, 200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 x  
600dpi  
– Color  
100 x 100 dpi (JPEG), 150 x 150 dpi (JPEG), 200 x 100 dpi (JPEG), 300 x 300 dpi (JPEG and  
PDF (Compact))  
– The maximum size of an image that you can send at a resolution of 600 x 600 dpi is 11" x 17". If the image  
exceeds this size, it may be cut off.  
– If you send a long original at a resolution of 600 x 600 dpi, the periphery of the original image may cut off  
slightly.  
– If you are sending documents by fax, the maximum size of an image that you can send at a resolution of 400 x  
400 dpi is 11" x 17".  
– If you are sending documents by fax, select B&W 200 x 100 dpi, B&W 200 x 200 dpi, B&W 200 x 400 dpi, or  
B&W 400 x 400 dpi. Otherwise, the document will be sent with poor resolution.  
4
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
Place your originals.  
Press [Resolution].  
Select the desired resolution.  
Press [OK].  
– If you select [PDF (Compact)] as the file  
format, the Color mode is set to [Color]  
and the resolution is set to [300 x 300 dpi]  
automatically, and the original type setting  
is disabled.  
– The color mode and resolution you can  
set differ depending on the file format you  
have selected. Follow the instructions on  
the screen.  
Specify the destination.  
Press [Scan Settings].  
Press [Option].  
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
4‑22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan  
Settings], then press [Option], then  
[Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
4‑23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scan Density and Original Type Settings  
You can set the scan density and select the original type before scanning the original.  
Manual Density Adjustment  
You can manually adjust the scan density to the most appropriate level for the original.  
If you select the Color mode, you should manually adjust the scan density.  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
4
Place your originals.  
Press [Light] or [Dark] to adjust the scan  
density.  
Press [Light] to move the indicator to the  
left to make the density lighter, or press  
[Dark] to move it to the right to make the  
density darker.  
Press [OK].  
Specify the destination.  
Press [Scan Settings].  
Press [Option].  
5
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan  
Settings], then press [Option], then  
[Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
4‑24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Density Adjustment  
The machine automatically adjusts the scan density to the level best suited to the quality  
of the original.  
– If you select the Color mode, automatic density adjustment cannot be used.  
– If you set the automatic density adjustment, the original type setting is disabled.  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
An automatic scan density adjustment may  
not work with transparencies. In this case,  
adjust the scan density manually by pressing  
[Light] or [Dark].  
Place your originals.  
5
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
Specify the destination.  
Press [Scan Settings].  
Press [Option].  
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan  
Settings], then press [Option], then  
[Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
4
Press [A].  
Press [OK].  
The machine automatically adjusts the scan  
density to the level best suited to the quality  
of the original.  
4‑25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Original Type Selection  
You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are  
scanning.  
The following three original type modes are available for adjusting the image quality.  
Text Mode  
This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals  
can also be scanned clearly.  
Text/Photo Mode  
This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos.  
Photo Mode  
This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper, or photo  
originals containing halftones (e.g., printed photos).  
– Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you  
select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.  
– If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré  
effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen the moiré effect by adjusting the  
scanning contrast (sharpness). (See “Sharpness,” on p. 12‑13.)  
– If you have selected [PDF (Compact)] as the file format, this setting is disabled.  
– If you select the automatic density adjustment mode, the original type setting is disabled.  
– If the original is a transparency, select the original type, then adjust the density to the most appropriate level  
for the original.  
Press [Scan Settings].  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
Press [Option].  
Place your originals.  
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
4
Specify the destination.  
Press the original type drop‑down list.  
4‑26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
Select the original type ([Text/Photo],  
[Photo], or [Text]).  
The machine automatically adjusts the scan  
density to the level best suited to the quality  
of the original.  
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan  
Settings], then press [Option], then  
[Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
5
Press [Light] or [Dark] to adjust the scan  
density.  
Press [Light] to move the indicator to the  
left to make the density lighter, or press  
[Dark] to move it to the right to make the  
density darker.  
Press [OK].  
4‑27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Two-Sided Originals  
You can set the machine to automatically turn over two‑sided originals placed in the feeder,  
so as to scan each side separately.  
When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as LTRR, make sure to place  
them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are  
scanned upside down.  
5
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
Place your originals in the feeder.  
Select the type of original.  
[Book Type]: The front and back sides of  
the original have the same top‑bottom  
orientation.  
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides  
of the original have opposite top‑bottom  
orientations.  
Specify the destination.  
Press [Scan Settings].  
Press [Option].  
Press [OK].  
6
7
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
4
Press (Start).  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
4‑28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan  
Settings], then press [Option], then  
[Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
4‑29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Different Size Originals  
This mode enables you to scan different size originals together.  
– The Different Size Originals mode cannot be used with the Document Size or Stamp mode.  
– If the originals are placed in the feeder, make sure that the different size originals are of the same weight  
(paper type).  
– Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder or the platen glass if you are placing  
originals with different widths. (“Width” refers to the vertical measurement of the paper from the front of the  
machine to the back of the machine when the paper is placed in the feeder or on the platen glass.)  
– Set different size originals in the following combinations. Other combinations may damage the originals.  
– 11" x 17" and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTRR  
– If you place originals with different widths into the feeder, the originals may move slightly when fed to the  
scanning area. As a result, the images may be scanned as slanted.  
– If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed may be slower than normal.  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
4
5
Place your originals.  
Specify the destination.  
Press [Scan Settings].  
Press [Option].  
Select the type of original.  
If you are placing originals with the same  
width, press [Same Width].  
If you are placing originals with different  
widths, press [Different Width].  
Press [OK].  
For instructions on specifying destinations,  
see “Specifying Destinations,” on p. 4‑32.  
4‑30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
7
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
– To cancel the scan settings, press [Scan  
Settings], then press [Option], then  
[Cancel].  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
4‑31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifying Destinations  
This section describes how to specify a destination for a send job. You can select  
a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch button, or specify a new  
address. You can also recall the destinations and settings stored in the favorites  
buttons to check their contents, edit them, or delete them.  
A maximum of 501 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 501 destinations, one new  
destination can be specified using the New Address tab.) If you specify a group, which is made up of several  
destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address.  
Using the New Address Tab  
This section describes the procedure for specifying a new destination that has not been  
stored in the Address Book.  
– If Restrict New Addresses in System Settings is set to [On], you cannot specify a destination using the New  
Address Tab. (See Chapter 8, “System Settings,” in the Reference Guide.)  
– The destination that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is  
sent.  
– If you frequently send documents to the same destinations, store these destinations in the Address Book  
beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing Address Book,” on p. 4‑57.)  
– You can specify only one destination at a time using the New Address tab.  
– Sending documents to an e‑mail, I‑fax, or file server address is available only for the imageCLASS MF7480.  
– To view the detailed information of the destination, press [Details].  
– You can edit an address specified from the New Address tab in the Details screen before you scan your  
documents. (See “Checking/Changing a Destination,” on p. 4‑49.)  
– You can erase the specified destination from the destination list before you scan your documents. (See  
Erasing a Destination,” on p. 4‑51.)  
4‑32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifying a Fax Number  
This mode enables you to specify a new fax number.  
4
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
Place your originals.  
Enter the recipient’s fax number (up to 120  
characters) using (numeric keys),  
and  
,
.
[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several  
seconds in the fax number you are  
dialing. If you insert a pause within the  
fax number, the letter <p> is displayed  
between the numbers. If you insert a  
pause at the end of the fax number, the  
letter <P> appears.  
Press [New Address].  
Press [Fax].  
When dialing an overseas number, insert  
a pause after the country code, and at the  
end of the fax number. (See “Pause Time,”  
on p. 12‑15.)  
If no destination is displayed on the Send  
Basic Features screen, you can skip this step.  
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly  
call an extension line that is connected to  
a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which  
accepts only tone signals. If you press  
[Tone], the letter <T> appears.  
[][]: Press to move the position of the  
cursor.  
[Backspace]: Press to delete the number  
or character immediately to the left of the  
cursor.  
[Direct]: Press to use the Direct Send  
mode. (See “Direct Sending,” on p. 4‑54.)  
[Hook]: Press to use tone dialing or to send  
a fax document manually. (See “Manual  
Sending,” on p. 4‑52.)  
4‑33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press [OK].  
– You cannot insert a pause at the beginning  
of a number.  
– If you enter a pause at the end of the  
number, the pause is always 10 seconds  
long.  
– You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.  
– If Confirm Entered Fax Numbers in Restrict  
Access to Destinations in System Setting  
is set to [On], you should enter the fax  
number again for confirmation. Enter  
the fax number you entered in step 2,  
then press [OK]. (See Chapter 8, “System  
Settings,” in the Reference Guide.)  
4‑34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifying an E-Mail Address (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)  
This mode enables you to specify a new e‑mail address. You can enter the e‑mail message  
address directly from the keyboard on the touch panel display.  
If you send a document via e‑mail, the document is sent as a file attached to an e‑mail message in the Color or  
B&W mode.  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
You can also use  
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your  
entry.  
(numeric keys) to  
Place your originals.  
Press [New Address].  
Press [E‑mail].  
4
Enter the e‑mail address (up to 120  
characters).  
Press [OK].  
4‑35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifying an I-Fax Address (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)  
This mode enables you to specify a new I‑fax address. Regardless of the distance and area,  
I‑fax helps you to reduce transmission costs by making transactions via the Internet. You  
can enter an I‑fax address directly from the keyboard on the touch panel display. You can  
also specify the scan settings and the settings at the destination when using I‑fax.  
The following conditions are always selected:  
– Paper Size: LTR  
This is because the sender does not know whether the recipient’s machine can receive sizes other than LTR.  
Originals larger than LTR are reduced to LTR size.  
– File Format: TIFF  
– Resolution: B&W 200 x 100 dpi or B&W 200 x 200 dpi  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
4
Place your originals.  
Enter the I‑fax address (up to 120  
characters).  
Press [OK].  
You can also use  
(numeric keys) to  
enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your  
entry.  
Press [New Address].  
Press [I‑Fax].  
4‑36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifying a File Server (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)  
This section describes the two methods for specifying a file server on the network as the  
destination of a send job. You can use the keyboard or the Browse key if you select Windows  
(SMB) as the server protocol.  
– Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista restricts the number of users or clients that can be accessed. Once the  
limit of users or clients has been reached, it is not possible to send documents to a file server using Windows  
2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.  
– If Language Switch in Common Settings is set to [On], the Host Name and File Path of the file server  
destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.  
– Set the following items when sending to a file server:  
– Protocol  
– Host Name  
– File Path  
– User  
– Password  
– For examples of the settings that are needed to send documents to a file server, see Chapter 6, “Network  
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the Reference Guide.  
– You can use  
(numeric keys) to enter numbers, and (Clear) to clear your entries.  
– If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, set the FTP server address specified in  
imageWARE Gateway as the destination. By using imageWARE Document Manager and the send function  
of the machine, you can manage digitized paper documents and computer data on the network. For more  
information on the imageWARE Document Manager, see the imageWARE Gateway manual.  
4‑37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Keyboard  
You can specify a file server as the destination directly from the keyboard displayed on the  
touch panel display. Press [Host Name], [File Path], [User], and [Password] to specify the file  
server settings.  
[FTP]: Select this protocol if you are sending  
documents to a computer running Sun  
Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
Information Services 5.0 under Windows  
2000 Server, Internet Information Services  
5.1 under Windows XP Professional, Internet  
Information Services 6.0 under Windows  
2003 Server, Internet Information Services 7.0  
under Windows Vista, or Red Hat Linux 7.2.  
[Windows (SMB)]: Select this protocol if  
you are sending documents to a computer  
running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later), or  
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.  
Place your originals.  
If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the server  
protocol, you can specify the file server by  
pressing [Browse]. For instructions on using  
the Browse key, see “Using the Browse Key  
(Windows (SMB)),” on p. 4‑41.  
Press [New Address].  
Press [File].  
4
5
Press the Protocol drop‑down list.  
Select the desired protocol.  
4‑38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
7
8
Enter the host name (up to 120  
characters).  
Enter the file path (up to 120 characters).  
Press [OK].  
Press [OK].  
– A file path is a series of characters that  
signify the location of the folder. Specify a  
folder in the file server as the destination of  
the send job.  
– If you are sending to an imageWARE  
Document Manager folder, enter the folder  
name set in imageWARE Gateway.  
A host name is a name assigned to a host  
computer that provides services on the  
Internet. A specific host name is assigned  
to each host computer to identify it on the  
Internet. In this entry box, enter the name  
of the file server on the network as the  
destination of the send job.  
9
10  
Enter the user name (up to 24 characters).  
Press [OK].  
If you are sending to an imageWARE  
Document Manager folder, enter the user  
name set in imageWARE Gateway.  
4‑39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
12  
Enter a password (up to 24 characters  
when [FTP] is selected as the server  
protocol, or up to 14 when [Windows  
(SMB)] is selected).  
Press [OK].  
If you are sending to an imageWARE  
Document Manager folder, enter the  
password set in imageWARE Gateway.  
13  
4‑40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))  
If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the protocol, you can specify a file server connected to a  
specific network by pressing [Browse] on the File screen. You can specify a file server from a  
workgroup.  
5
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
Place your originals.  
After turning the main power on, you must  
wait for the time set in Startup Time Settings  
to elapse before pressing [Browse]. Network  
transmission is not possible until this startup  
time has elapsed. (See Chapter 6, “Network  
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the  
Reference Guide.)  
Press [New Address].  
Press [File].  
4
6
Press the Protocol drop‑down list.  
Select the desired workgroup.  
Press [Down].  
To move up one level, press [Up].  
If the desired workgroup is not displayed,  
press [] or [] to scroll to the desired  
workgroup.  
Select [Windows (SMB)].  
4‑41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
9
Select the desired file server.  
Press [Down].  
To move up one level, press [Up].  
If the Enter Network Password  
screen is displayed:  
Press [User Name].  
Enter your user name (up to 24  
characters), then press [OK].  
Press [Password].  
Enter your network password (up to 14  
characters), then press [OK].  
Press [OK].  
Press [Down].  
If the desired file server is not displayed, press  
[] or [] to scroll to the desired file server.  
8
Select the folder on the specified server to  
which you want to send your documents.  
Press [OK].  
To move down one level, press [Down].  
To move up one level, press [Up].  
If the desired folder is not displayed, press  
[] or [] to scroll to the desired folder.  
4‑42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Address Book  
The Address Book is a directory for storing destinations. A maximum of 500 destinations  
(including 200 one‑touch destinations) can be stored. Storing a destination in the Address  
Book saves you the effort of entering frequently used destinationsaddresses each time you  
send a job.  
– To use this feature, destinations must be stored in the Address Book beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing  
Address Book,” on p. 4‑58.)  
– Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See Chapter 7,  
“Remote UI (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the Reference Guide.)  
– To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination, then press [Details].  
– You can erase destinations on the Send Basic Features screen before scanning. (See “Erasing a Destination,”  
on p. 4‑51.)  
4
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
Place your originals.  
Select the desired destination from the  
Address Book.  
Press [OK].  
– You can select multiple destinations.  
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to  
display the individual keys for each letter or  
number. You can select a letter or number  
to restrict the displayed range of entries.  
Press [All] to return to the full address list.  
– If the desired destination is not displayed,  
press [] or [] to scroll to the desired  
destination.  
– You can restrict the type of destinations  
displayed in the result list by pressing the  
Type drop‑down list.  
– You can display the destinations registered  
in one‑touch buttons by selecting One‑  
touch from the Type drop‑down list.  
4‑43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
– If the registered destination name is longer  
than 15 characters, the first 15 characters  
are displayed in the Name column in the  
Address Book.  
– To cancel a selected destination, select the  
destination again to clear the check mark.  
– To view the detailed information of a  
selected destination, select the destination,  
then press [Details].  
4‑44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the One-Touch Buttons  
You can specify up to 200 destinations in one‑touch buttons. Follow the procedure below  
to start a transmission and send a document with the press of a one‑touch button.  
– To use this feature, destinations must be stored in one‑touch buttons beforehand. (See “Storing/Editing One‑  
Touch Buttons,” on p. 4‑71.)  
– To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination, then press [Details].  
– You can erase destinations on the Send Basic Features screen before scanning. (See “Erasing a Destination,”  
on p. 4‑51.)  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
– You can select multiple one‑touch buttons.  
– Each one‑touch button is assigned a three‑  
digit number. If you know the one‑touch  
button’s three digit number, enter the  
three digit number of the desired one‑  
Place your originals.  
touch button using  
(numeric keys).  
– If the desired one‑touch button is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired one‑touch button.  
– To view the detailed information of a  
selected destination, select the destination,  
then press [Details].  
– To cancel the selected one‑touch button,  
press [One‑touch Buttons], then press the  
selected one‑touch button again.  
4
Select the desired one‑touch button.  
Press [Done].  
4‑45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Group Addresses  
Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the Address  
Book or one‑touch buttons. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several  
destinations. You can register up to 499 destinations in one group.  
– To use this feature, group addresses must be stored in one‑touch buttons or Address Book beforehand. (See  
– To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination, then press [Details].  
– You can erase destinations on the Send Basic Features screen before scanning. (See “Erasing a Destination,”  
on p. 4‑51.)  
2
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
Place your originals.  
Specify a group address.  
To specify a group from the  
Select the destinations for the group  
Address Book:  
address.  
Press [OK].  
1
– You can specify multiple groups at the  
same time.  
– To restrict the type of destinations  
displayed in the result list, press the  
Type drop‑down list, then press [Group].  
– To cancel a selected group, select the  
group again to clear the check mark.  
– To view the detailed information of a  
selected group, select the destination,  
then press [Details].  
4‑46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To specify a group from the one-  
touch buttons:  
1
2
Press the one‑touch button containing  
the group address.  
Press [Done].  
To specify two or more groups, select  
all of the desired one‑touch buttons  
containing the group address, then  
press [Done].  
To cancel a selected group destination,  
press the one‑touch button again.  
4‑47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Favorites Buttons  
If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same  
destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to specify  
the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing your stored  
document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.  
– To use this feature, you must first register the desired document settings and destinations in favorites  
buttons. (See “Storing/Editing Favorites Buttons,” on p. 4‑86.)  
– To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination, then press [Details].  
– You can erase destinations on the Send Basic Features screen before scanning. (See “Erasing a Destination,”  
on p. 4‑51.)  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
– If the desired favorites button is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired favorites button.  
Place your originals.  
– You can manually change the recalled  
settings from the selected favorites button  
before you send your documents.  
– If you press another favorites button, the  
settings stored in that button are recalled.  
– To cancel all settings and return the  
machine to the Standard mode, press  
(Reset).  
– If multiple destinations are stored  
under the selected favorites button, the  
destinations may not be listed in the order  
in which they were set.  
4
Select the desired Favorites Button.  
Press [Done].  
4‑48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Checking/Changing a Destination  
You can check and change a specified destination before you scan your documents.  
Only the destination specified using the New Address tab can be changed.  
If the destination has been  
1
specified using one of the  
sending methods in the New  
Address tab:  
1
Select the destination.  
Press [Details].  
– If only one destination is specified, just  
press [Details].  
– If the destination that you want to check or  
change is not displayed, press [] or []  
to scroll to the desired destination.  
Check or change the destination’s  
information.  
Change the destination’s information  
in the same way that you specified it.  
(See “Using the New Address Tab,” on  
p. 4‑32.)  
2
Check or change the destinations  
information.  
Press [OK].  
If the destination is a group  
If the destination has been  
specified using any method  
other than New Address tab:  
address:  
1
1
Select one destination at a time.  
Press [Details].  
Check the destination’s information.  
Press [Done].  
4‑49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
3
Check the destination’s information.  
Press [Done]  
4‑50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing a Destination  
You can erase a specified destination from the destination list before you scan your  
documents.  
1
Select the destination to be erased.  
Press [Erase].  
– If only one destination is specified, just  
press [Erase].  
– If the destination that you want to check or  
change is not displayed, press [] or []  
to scroll to the desired destination.  
4‑51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Manual Sending  
Use manual sending when you want to talk to the recipient before sending a  
fax document, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive  
automatically.  
– Manual Sending enables you to send a document consisting of two or more pages only if you use the feeder  
to send it. You can only send one page at a time when you place your originals on the platen glass.  
– If you cancel Manual Sending during transmission, the pages that have already been scanned are sent. You  
can check how many pages have been sent to the destination by printing an Activity Report. (See “Printing  
– You cannot use group dialing for manual sending.  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
5
Place your originals.  
– For instructions on specifying the scan  
settings, see “Scan Settings,” on p. 4‑16.  
– For instructions on setting the Stamp  
mode, see Chapter 4, “Sending and  
Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.  
Press [New Address].  
Press [Fax].  
4
You should hear the dial tone.  
4‑52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
7
8
When you hear a high-pitched  
tone, press (Start).  
Scanning starts and the document is sent.  
During the transmission, the transaction  
number and page number are displayed in  
the Job Monitor area.  
Specify the scan settings.  
Press [OK].  
To cancel manual sending, press [Cancel].  
Enter the recipient’s fax number (up to 120  
characters) using  
(numeric keys).  
You can also specify the destination by  
pressing [One‑touch Buttons].  
You can enter an extension number after  
dialing the fax number.  
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly  
call an extension line that is connected to  
a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which  
accepts only tone signals. If you press  
[Tone], the letter <T> appears.  
[One‑touch Buttons]: Press to specify  
destinations using the one‑touch buttons.  
p. 4‑45.)  
[Scan Settings]: Press to set the Scan  
mode. (See “Scan Settings,” on p. 4‑16.)  
– You cannot use group dialing for manual  
sending.  
– To cancel manual sending, press [End].  
4‑53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Sending  
This section describes the procedure for sending a fax with the Direct Sending mode.  
Memory Sending  
All of the originals to be sent are first scanned and read into memory, then sent. This  
means that you do not need to stay near the machine once the originals have been  
scanned.  
Direct Sending  
The machine sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned.  
Although Direct Sending is slower than Memory Sending, you can use Direct Sending  
when you need to send an urgent document ahead of other documents stored in  
memory.  
– The memory can hold a total of approximately 1,000 pages for sent and received documents.  
– If the memory becomes full, delete unwanted received documents using the System Monitor screen. (See  
Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)  
– With Direct Sending, you can send a document of two or more pages only when using the feeder. You can  
only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.  
– You can specify only one destination at a time for Direct Sending.  
– Memory Sending is automatically set when using Delayed Send or when multiple destinations are specified.  
– If an error occurs or you cancel transmission in the Direct Sending mode, you can check how many pages  
have been sent to the destination by printing the Activity Report, or on the Log screen for Fax on the System  
Monitor screen.  
4‑54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
– To cancel Direct sending mode, press  
[Direct] again.  
– For instructions on setting the Delayed  
Send or Stamp mode, see Chapter 4,  
“Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference  
Guide.  
Place your originals.  
Specify the destination.  
7
Press (Start).  
For more information on specifying the  
destination, see “Specifying Destinations,” on  
p. 4‑32.  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
As soon as transmission is possible, the  
original is scanned and sent while scanning is  
taking place.  
During transmission, the transaction number  
and page number currently being sent are  
displayed in the Job Monitor area.  
If the transmission completes successfully,  
the message <Sent OK> appears in the  
message area for approximately two seconds.  
After the original has been sent, Direct  
Sending is canceled automatically.  
4
5
Specify the desired send options.  
For instructions on specifying the scan  
settings, see “Scan Settings,” on p. 4‑16.  
To cancel transmission, press [Cancel]  
(Stop). Scanning and transmission of  
documents are canceled from the time you  
cancel the transmission.  
6
Press [Direct].  
Press [Done].  
If you specify the destination using  
(numeric keys) or New Address tab,  
press [Direct] on the same screen.  
4‑55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Job Recall  
You can recall the last three destinations, scan settings, and send settings that have  
been set, and then send your documents.  
– The machine considers any one of the following operations a send job:  
– When settings, such as the destination, scan settings, and send settings, are specified, and the control panel  
power switch, (Start), or (Reset) is pressed  
– When the Auto Clear mode activates after the send settings are specified  
– The Standard mode is not stored in Recall memory.  
– The three most recent settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the power is turned off.  
1
2
3
Press  
(SEND).  
– If there are more stored Send settings  
than are currently displayed, you can scroll  
through the list by pressing [] or [].  
– You can change the settings for a recalled  
send job.  
– If there are multiple destinations stored  
in Recall memory, the order of the  
destinations shown in the list may not  
correspond to the order in which they were  
specified.  
Place your originals.  
5
Press (Start).  
If the original is placed on the platen glass,  
follow the instructions that appear on the  
touch panel display, then press (Start) once  
for each original. When scanning is complete,  
press [Done].  
4
Scanning starts.  
The scanned data is sent to the specified  
destination when scanning is complete.  
Select [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].  
Confirm the settings, then press [OK].  
4‑56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Storing/Editing Address Book  
This machine provides you with various ways to specify the destination besides using  
the numeric keys. You can register fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and  
file server addresses to the Address Book. Once you have registered destinations, you  
can specify the destinations in the following ways:  
You can specify destinations by pressing [Address Book] and selecting destinations  
from the Address Book. You can store up to 500 destinations (including 200 one‑touch  
buttons) in the Address Book.  
You can specify destinations by pressing [One‑touch Buttons] and then the desired one‑  
touch buttons. You can store up to 200 one‑touch buttons.  
You can specify groups of destinations registered in the Address Book or one‑touch  
buttons. You can register up to 499 destinations in a group.  
You can specify destinations by pressing [Favorites Buttons] and then the desired  
favorites buttons. You can store up to 18 destinations with document settings.  
– Storing e‑mail, I‑fax, or file server addresses is available only for the imageCLASS MF7480.  
– By storing your own e‑mail address, you can specify a reply e‑mail address.  
– Since each address entry is treated as a single entry, if an e‑mail address is registered in a group address, that  
e‑mail address and the group address are counted as two entries.  
– You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations need to be registered in the  
Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address.  
– If a password has been set for the Address Book, you must enter the password to enter Address Book Settings  
menu. Enter the password with  
(numeric keys), then press [OK].  
– Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported  
into the machine. For information on exporting the Address Book, see Chapter 7, “Remote UI (imageCLASS  
MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the Reference Guide.  
– For easy reference, print out the list of recipients registered in the Address Book or one‑touch buttons. (See  
Chapter 11, “Appendix,” in the Reference Guide.)  
4‑57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Storing/Editing Address Book  
Registering Fax Numbers  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
5
6
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
Enter the recipient’s fax number (up to 120  
characters) using (numeric keys),  
and  
3
4
,
.
[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several  
seconds in the fax number you are  
dialing. If you insert a pause within the  
fax number, the letter <p> is displayed  
between the numbers. If you insert a  
pause at the end of the fax number, the  
letter <P> appears. When dialing an  
overseas number, insert a pause after the  
country code, and at the end of the fax  
number. (See “Pause Time,” on p. 12‑15.)  
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly  
call an extension line that is connected to  
a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which  
accepts only tone signals. If you press  
[Tone], the letter <T> appears.  
4‑58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
[] []: Press to move the position of the  
cursor.  
[Backspace]: Press to delete the number  
or character immediately to the left of the  
cursor.  
If your document transmissions are slow in  
starting, this may mean that the telephone  
lines in your area are in poor condition. Select  
a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps],  
[14400 bps], [9600 bps], or [4800 bps].  
[Space]: Press to insert a space between  
numbers.  
9
– You cannot insert a pause or a space at the  
beginning of a number.  
– If you enter a pause at the end of the  
number, the pause is always 10 seconds  
long.  
– You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.  
Press [Option] or [Next].  
If you want to specify the sending speed,  
type of call, and ECM TX settings, press  
[Option] and proceed to step 7.  
Otherwise, press [Next] and skip to  
step 15.  
10  
7
8
Select the type of call.  
Select [Domestic] for dialing domestic  
(local) telephone numbers. Select [Long  
Distance (1)] if communication errors  
frequently occur when you make overseas  
calls (when the overseas telephone  
number is registered in the Address  
Book). If errors persist, try selecting [Long  
Distance (2)] or [Long Distance (3)].  
Press [OK].  
11  
Select the desired sending speed.  
Press [OK].  
4‑59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
The first character you enter for the name is  
used for sorting the destination list when you  
press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on the  
Address Book screen.  
16  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
Select [On] or [Off].  
Press [OK].  
13  
14  
15  
Enter a name for the recipient of the fax  
(up to 16 characters).  
Press [OK].  
4‑60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering E-Mail Addresses  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
5
6
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
Enter the e‑mail address (up to 120  
characters).  
Press [Next].  
3
4
7
Enter a name for the e‑mail address (up to  
16 characters).  
Press [OK].  
The first character that you enter for the  
name is used for sorting the address list when  
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on  
the Address Book screen.  
4‑61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
4‑62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering I-Fax Addresses  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
5
6
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
Enter the I‑fax address (up to 120  
characters).  
Press [Next].  
3
4
7
Enter a name for the I‑fax address (up to  
16 characters).  
Press [OK].  
The first character that you enter for the  
name is used for sorting the address list when  
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on  
the Address Book screen.  
4‑63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
4‑64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering File Server Addresses  
If Language Switch in Common Settings is set to [On], the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination  
may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.  
5
6
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
Press the Protocol drop‑down list.  
3
4
Select the desired protocol.  
4‑65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
[FTP]: Select this protocol if you are sending  
documents to a computer running Sun  
Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet  
The first character that you enter for the  
name is used for sorting the address list when  
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on  
the Address Book screen.  
Information Services 5.0 under Windows  
2000 Server, Internet Information Services  
5.1 under Windows XP Professional, Internet  
Information Services 6.0 under Windows  
2003 Server, Internet Information Services 7.0  
under Windows Vista, or Red Hat Linux 7.2.  
[Windows (SMB)]: Select this protocol if  
you are sending documents to a computer  
running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later), or  
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.  
9
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
7
Set [Host Name], [File Path], [User], and  
[Password].  
Press [Next].  
For instructions on specifying each of the  
settings for FTP and Windows (SMB), see  
MF7480 Only),” on p. 4‑37.  
8
Enter a name for file server address (up to  
16 characters).  
Press [OK].  
4‑66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering Group Addresses  
The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 499 stored destinations  
as a single destination.  
If you want to store a group address, the destinations must be stored beforehand, such as fax numbers, e‑mail  
addresses, and file server addresses.  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
4
5
6
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
3
4‑67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7
9
Select the destinations to store in the  
group address.  
Press [OK].  
10  
– To cancel a selected destination, select the  
destination again to clear the check mark.  
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to  
display the individual keys for each letter or  
number. You can select a letter or number  
to restrict the displayed range of entries.  
Press [All] to return to the full address list.  
– If the desired destination is not displayed,  
press [] or [] to scroll to the desired  
destination.  
Enter a name for the group address (up to  
16 characters).  
Press [OK].  
– You can restrict the type of destinations  
displayed in the results list by pressing the  
Type drop‑down list.  
– You can select a destination and  
press [Details] to confirm the detailed  
information related to the selected  
destination. Press [Done] to return to the  
previous screen.  
The first character that you enter for the  
name is used for sorting the address list when  
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on  
the Address Book screen.  
11  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
8
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to add other  
destinations.  
To erase a destination, select a destination  
from the group address list, then press  
[Erase].  
4‑68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing Address Details  
You can change destination details as necessary.  
Press [Edit].  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
The current settings for the selected  
destination appear.  
– You cannot edit multiple destinations at  
the same time.  
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to  
display the individual keys for each letter or  
number. You can select a letter or number  
to restrict the displayed range of entries.  
Press [All] to return to the full address list.  
– If the desired destination is not displayed,  
press [] or [] to scroll to the desired  
destination.  
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
– You can restrict the type of destinations  
displayed in the results list by pressing the  
Type drop‑down list.  
– You can select a destination and  
press [Details] to confirm the detailed  
information related to the selected  
destination. Press [Done] to return to the  
previous screen.  
– If you select [All] in the Address Book drop‑  
down list, the destinations stored in the  
one‑touch buttons are displayed. However,  
you cannot edit these destinations. For  
instructions on editing one‑touch buttons,  
on p. 4‑71.  
3
4
5
Select the destination to be changed.  
Edit the address details.  
You can only change the name of a  
destination registered as a group address.  
Press [Next].  
4‑69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
If necessary, edit the address name.  
Press [OK].  
– For instructions on setting fax numbers,  
see “Registering Fax Numbers,” on p. 4‑58.  
– For instructions on setting  
e‑mail addresses, see “Registering E‑Mail  
Addresses,” on p. 4‑61.  
– For instructions on setting I‑fax addresses,  
p. 4‑63.  
– For instructions on setting file server  
addresses, see “Registering File Server  
Addresses,” on p. 4‑65.  
– For instructions on setting group  
addresses, see “Registering Group  
Addresses,” on p. 4‑67.  
7
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
4‑70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons  
You can store up to 200 destinations in the one‑touch buttons. This section describes how  
to store/edit the destinations with the one‑touch button feature.  
– If Language Switch in Common Settings is set to [On], the Host Name and File Path of the file server  
destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.  
– Destinations stored in one‑touch buttons are also displayed in the Address Book.  
Registering/Editing Fax Numbers  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
4
Select a one‑touch button to store or  
change.  
Press [Register/Edit].  
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
– If the desired one‑touch button is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired one‑touch button.  
– You can also specify the one‑touch  
button’s number by entering the three  
digit number of the desired one‑touch  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
3
button using  
(numeric keys).  
– One‑touch buttons that already have  
destinations stored in them are displayed  
with a black square () in the lower right  
corner of the key.  
– If you select a one‑touch button that  
already has destinations stored in it, the  
destinations are displayed.  
– If you register multiple destinations as a  
group address in a one‑touch button, the  
number of destinations registered in the  
group address is displayed.  
4‑71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
– You cannot insert a pause or a space at the  
beginning of a number.  
– If you enter a pause at the end of the  
number, the pause is always 10 seconds  
long.  
– You can press (Clear) to clear your entry.  
Press [Option] or [Next].  
If you want to specify the sending speed,  
type of call, and ECM TX settings, press  
[Option] and proceed to step 7.  
Otherwise, press [Next] and skip to  
step 15.  
If you select a one‑touch button already  
storing a destination, skip this step.  
7
8
Enter the recipient’s fax number (up to 120  
characters) using  
and  
(numeric keys),  
,
.
[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several  
seconds in the fax number you are  
dialing. If you insert a pause within the  
fax number, the letter <p> is displayed  
between the numbers. If you insert a  
pause at the end of the fax number, the  
letter <P> appears. When dialing an  
overseas number, insert a pause after the  
country code, and at the end of the fax  
number. (See “Pause Time,” on p. 12‑15.)  
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly  
call an extension line that is connected to  
a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which  
accepts only tone signals. If you press  
[Tone], the letter <T> appears.  
Select the desired sending speed.  
Press [OK].  
If your document transmissions are slow in  
starting, this may mean that the telephone  
lines in your area are in poor condition. Select  
a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps],  
[14400 bps], [9600 bps], or [4800 bps].  
[] []: Press to move the position of the  
cursor.  
[Backspace]: Press to delete the number  
or character immediately to the left of the  
cursor.  
[Space]: Press to insert a space between  
numbers.  
4‑72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
12  
Select [On] or [Off].  
Press [OK].  
10  
13  
14  
15  
Select the type of call.  
Select [Domestic] for dialing domestic  
(local) telephone numbers. Select [Long  
Distance (1)] if communication errors  
frequently occur when you make overseas  
calls (when the overseas telephone  
number is registered in the Address  
Book). If errors persist, try selecting [Long  
Distance (2)] or [Long Distance (3)].  
Press [OK].  
11  
Enter a name for the recipient of the fax  
(up to 16 characters).  
Press [OK].  
4‑73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The first character you enter for the name is  
used for sorting the destination list when you  
press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on the  
Address Book screen.  
16  
17  
Enter a name for the one‑touch button (up  
to 12 characters).  
Press [OK].  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
4‑74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering/Editing E-Mail Addresses  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
– If the desired one‑touch button is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired one‑touch button.  
– You can also specify the one‑touch  
button’s number by entering the three  
digit number of the desired one‑touch  
button using  
(numeric keys).  
– One‑touch buttons that already have  
destinations stored in them are displayed  
with a black square () in the lower right  
corner of the key.  
– If you select a one‑touch button that  
already has destinations stored in it, the  
destinations are displayed.  
– If you register multiple destinations as a  
group address in a one‑touch button, the  
number of destinations registered in the  
group address is displayed.  
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
3
4
5
If you select a one‑touch button already  
storing a destination, skip this step.  
Select a one‑touch button to store or  
change.  
Press [Register/Edit].  
4‑75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
7
9
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
Enter the e‑mail address (up to 120  
characters).  
Press [Next].  
Enter a name for the e‑mail address (up to  
16 characters).  
Press [OK].  
The first character that you enter for the  
name is used for sorting the address list when  
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on  
the Address Book screen.  
8
Enter a name for the one‑touch button (up  
to 12 characters).  
Press [OK].  
4‑76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering/Editing I-Fax Addresses  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
– If the desired one‑touch button is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired one‑touch button.  
– You can also specify the one‑touch  
button’s number by entering the three  
digit number of the desired one‑touch  
button using  
(numeric keys).  
– One‑touch buttons that already have  
destinations stored in them are displayed  
with a black square () in the lower right  
corner of the key.  
– If you select a one‑touch button that  
already has destinations stored in it, the  
destinations are displayed.  
– If you register multiple destinations as a  
group address in a one‑touch button, the  
number of destinations registered in the  
group address is displayed.  
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
3
4
5
6
If you select a one‑touch button already  
storing a destination, skip this step.  
Select a one‑touch button to store or  
change.  
Press [Register/Edit].  
Enter the I‑fax address (up to 120  
characters).  
Press [Next].  
4‑77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
Enter a name for the I‑fax address (up to  
16 characters).  
Press [OK].  
The first character that you enter for the  
name is used for sorting the address list when  
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on  
the Address Book screen.  
8
9
Enter a name for the one‑touch button (up  
to 12 characters).  
Press [OK].  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
4‑78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering/Editing File Server Addresses  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
– If the desired one‑touch button is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired one‑touch button.  
– You can also specify the one‑touch  
button’s number by entering the three  
digit number of the desired one‑touch  
button using  
(numeric keys).  
– One‑touch buttons that already have  
destinations stored in them are displayed  
with a black square () in the lower right  
corner of the key.  
– If you select a one‑touch button that  
already has destinations stored in it, the  
destinations are displayed.  
– If you register multiple destinations as a  
group address in a one‑touch button, the  
number of destinations registered in the  
group address is displayed.  
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
3
4
5
6
If you select a one‑touch button already  
storing a destination, skip this step.  
Select a one‑touch button to store or  
change.  
Press [Register/Edit].  
Press the Protocol drop‑down list.  
4‑79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Select the desired protocol.  
Enter a name for file server address (up to  
16 characters).  
Press [OK].  
[FTP]: Select this protocol if you are sending  
documents to a computer running Sun  
Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet  
Information Services 5.0 under Windows  
2000 Server, Internet Information Services  
5.1 under Windows XP Professional, Internet  
Information Services 6.0 under Windows  
2003 Server, Internet Information Services 7.0  
under Windows Vista, or Red Hat Linux 7.2.  
[Windows (SMB)]: Select this protocol if  
you are sending documents to a computer  
running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later), or  
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.  
The first character that you enter for the  
name is used for sorting the address list when  
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on  
the Address Book screen.  
9
7
Enter a name for the one‑touch button (up  
to 12 characters).  
Press [OK].  
Set [Host Name], [File Path], [User], and  
[Password].  
Press [Next].  
10  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
For instructions on specifying each of the  
settings for FTP and Windows (SMB), see  
MF7480 Only),” on p. 4‑37.  
4‑80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering/Editing Group Addresses  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
– If the desired one‑touch button is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired one‑touch button.  
– You can also specify the one‑touch  
button’s number by entering the three  
digit number of the desired one‑touch  
button using  
(numeric keys).  
– One‑touch buttons that already have  
destinations stored in them are displayed  
with a black square () in the lower right  
corner of the key.  
– If you select a one‑touch button that  
already has destinations stored in it, the  
destinations are displayed.  
– If you register multiple destinations as a  
group address in a one‑touch button, the  
number of destinations registered in the  
group address is displayed.  
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
3
4
5
6
If you select a one‑touch button already  
storing a group address, skip this step.  
Select a one‑touch button to store or  
change.  
Press [Register/Edit].  
4‑81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7
9
Select the destinations to store in the  
group address.  
Enter a name for the group (up to 16  
characters).  
Press [OK].  
Press [Next].  
– To cancel a selected destination, select the  
destination again to clear the check mark.  
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to  
display the individual keys for each letter or  
number. You can select a letter or number  
to restrict the displayed range of entries.  
Press [All] to return to the full address list.  
– If the desired destination is not displayed,  
press [] or [] to scroll to the desired  
destination.  
– Only destinations that are already stored in  
one‑touch buttons can be selected as part  
of a one‑touch button group address.  
– You can select a destination and  
press [Details] to confirm the detailed  
information related to the selected  
destination. Press [Done] to return to the  
previous screen.  
The first character that you enter for the  
name is used for sorting the address list when  
you press keys, such as [ABC] and [DEF], on  
the Address Book screen.  
10  
11  
Enter a name for the one‑touch button (up  
to 12 characters).  
Press [OK].  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
8
4‑82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing Addresses  
Erasing Addresses from the Address Book  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
– You cannot erase multiple destinations at  
the same time.  
– Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to  
display the individual keys for each letter or  
number. You can select a letter or number  
to restrict the displayed range of entries.  
Press [All] to return to the full address list.  
– If the desired destination is not displayed,  
press [] or [] to scroll to the desired  
destination.  
– You can restrict the type of destinations  
displayed in the results list by pressing the  
Type drop‑down list.  
– You can select a destination and  
press [Details] to confirm the detailed  
information related to the selected  
destination. Press [Done] to return to the  
previous screen.  
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
– If you select [All] in the Address Book drop‑  
down list, the destinations stored in the  
one‑touch buttons are displayed. However,  
you cannot erase these destinations. For  
instructions on erasing one‑touch buttons,  
p. 4‑85.  
3
4
5
To cancel erasing, press [No].  
The message <Erased.> appears for  
approximately two seconds on the touch  
panel display.  
Select the destination to be erased.  
Press [Erase].  
4‑83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
4‑84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing One-Touch Buttons  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
– If the desired one‑touch button is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired one‑touch button.  
– You can also specify the one‑touch  
button’s number by entering the three  
digit number of the desired one‑touch  
button using  
(numeric keys).  
– Make sure that you verify the settings first  
before you erase them.  
– One‑touch buttons that already have  
destinations stored in them are displayed  
with a black square () in the lower right  
corner of the key.  
– If you select a one‑touch button that  
already has destinations stored in it, the  
destinations are displayed.  
– If you register multiple destinations as a  
group address in a one‑touch button, the  
number of destinations registered in the  
group address is displayed.  
If a password has been set for the  
Address Book, enter the password using  
(numeric keys), then press [OK] to  
enter the Address Book Settings menu. (See  
Chapter 8, “System Settings,in the Reference  
Guide.)  
3
4
5
6
To cancel erasing, press [No].  
The message <Erased.> appears for  
approximately two seconds on the touch  
panel display.  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
Select a one‑touch button containing the  
destination(s) you want to erase.  
Press [Erase].  
4‑85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Storing/Editing Favorites Buttons  
You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them in a favorites  
button in memory. There are 18 favorites buttons and they can be assigned names for  
increased convenience. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.  
– The send settings registered as favorites buttons in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned off.  
– If an address included in a favorites button is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the  
settings registered in the favorites button.  
Registering/Editing a Favorites Button  
1
Specify the send settings that you  
want to register.  
5
6
2
3
Press (Additional Functions).  
If the desired setting is not displayed, press  
[] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.  
4
Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M18])  
for registering the send settings.  
Press [Register/Edit].  
– If the desired Favorites Button is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired Favorites Button.  
– Keys that already have settings stored in  
them are displayed with a black square ()  
in the lower right corner of the key.  
4‑86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
7
8
10  
11  
Enter a name for line 1 (up to 10  
characters).  
Press [Next].  
– If you select a key that already has settings  
stored in it, the settings are displayed.  
– If there are more stored send settings than  
are currently displayed, you can scroll  
through the list by pressing [] or [].  
Enter a name for line 2 (if necessary) (up to  
10 characters).  
Press [OK].  
The message <Stored in memory.> appears  
for approximately two seconds on the touch  
panel display.  
– Two lines can be used for a favorites button  
name.  
– If you press [OK] without entering any  
characters, the key name reverts to its  
current name (default: M1 to M18).  
– To cancel storing the settings, press [No].  
– If you select a key that already has settings  
stored in it, a screen appears asking  
for your confirmation to overwrite the  
previous settings appears. To overwrite the  
setting, press [Yes]. To cancel overwriting  
the settings, press [No].  
12  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
9
4‑87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Erasing a Favorites Button  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
5
Select a Favorites Button with the send  
settings that you want to erase.  
Press [Erase].  
A screen appears, asking for your  
confirmation to erase the settings.  
3
4
– If the desired Favorites Button is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired Favorites Button.  
– Make sure to check the settings first before  
erasing them.  
– Keys that already have settings stored in  
them are displayed with a black square ()  
in the lower right corner of the key.  
6
To cancel erasing the settings, press [No].  
The message <Erased.> appears for  
approximately two seconds on the touch  
panel display.  
If the desired setting is not displayed, press  
[] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.  
4‑88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– If there are more stored send settings than  
are currently displayed, you can scroll  
through the list by pressing [] or [].  
– Key names are not erased. For instructions  
on changing a key name, see “Registering/  
7
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
4‑89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Canceling TX Jobs  
You can cancel a job using the touch panel display or System Monitor screen, or by  
pressing (Stop).  
Using the Touch Panel Display  
You can cancel a send job by pressing [Cancel], while the job is being scanned.  
1
2
Remove your originals.  
Using the Stop Key  
You can cancel a send job by pressing (Stop), while the job is being scanned.  
1
2
Press (Stop).  
Remove your originals.  
4‑90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the System Monitor Screen  
You can cancel a send job while it is being sent or waiting to be sent, or a fax receive job  
while it is being received.  
Fax  
1
– If the job that you want to cancel is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired job.  
– You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel  
them all at once. Select and cancel one job  
at a time.  
– If a job is in the process of being sent, it  
may not be canceled even if you press  
[Cancel].  
2
– If you cancel a job during sequential  
broadcasting, all of the destinations  
following the one to which the document  
is currently being sent will be canceled.  
5
3
If you do not want to cancel the job, press  
[No].  
The message <Canceling...> appears for  
approximately two seconds on the touch  
panel display.  
4
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No  
Good) on the Log screen.  
Select the job that you want to cancel.  
Press [Cancel].  
4‑91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
4‑92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-Mail, I-Fax, or Sending to a File Server  
1
– If the job that you want to cancel is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired job.  
– You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel  
them all at once. Select and cancel one job  
at a time.  
– If a job is in the process of being sent, it  
may not be canceled even if you press  
[Cancel].  
– If you cancel a job during sequential  
broadcasting, all of the destinations  
following the one to which the document  
is currently being sent will be canceled.  
2
5
3
If you do not want to cancel the job, press  
[No].  
The message <Canceling...> appears for  
approximately two seconds on the touch  
panel display.  
4
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No  
Good) on the TX Job Log screen.  
6
Select the job that you want to cancel.  
Press [Cancel].  
4‑93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking TX Jobs  
System monitor enables you to view the transmission results, and monitor the status  
of the send jobs.  
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs  
This section describes how to check the status of fax jobs.  
– If Job Log Display in System Settings is set to [Off], [Log] is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.  
– The maximum numbers of jobs that are displayed are:  
– TX Job Status screen: 70 jobs  
– Log screen: 128 jobs  
– When the maximum number of jobs that can be displayed is reached, the oldest job is deleted each time a  
new job is added.  
Checking Fax Job Details  
You can check the detailed information of any fax job, such as the destination and the date  
and time the job was specified.  
1
2
3
4
Select the job whose detailed information  
you want to check.  
Press [Details].  
4‑94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
– If the job that you want to cancel is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired job.  
– You can cancel TX jobs which are being  
sent or waiting to be sent by pressing  
[Cancel] in [TX Job Status]. For more  
information, see “Using the System Monitor  
Screen,” on p. 4‑91.  
5
6
Check the details of the selected  
job.  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
4‑95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing the Fax Job Log (Activity Report)  
You can print the Activity Report which includes the transmission’s start time, destination,  
job number, transmission mode, number of pages, and transmission result.  
1
– Fax jobs sent from the fax driver are not  
printed in the Activity Report.  
– The Fax Job Log can be printed only if  
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR paper (plain  
or recycled paper) is loaded in the paper  
sources whose settings in Other in Drawer  
Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings  
(from the Additional Functions screen)  
are set to [On]. (See “Automatic Paper  
2
p. 2‑25.)  
5
3
To cancel printing, press [No].  
The Activity Report is printed.  
6
4
4‑96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Checking the Status of Send Jobs (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)  
This section describes how to check/change the status of send jobs.  
– If Job Log Display in System Settings is set to [Off], [TX Job Log] is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.  
– Send jobs to e‑mail, I‑fax, and file servers can be checked.  
– The maximum numbers of jobs that are displayed are:  
– Job status screen: 70 jobs  
– Job log screen: 128 jobs  
– When the maximum number of jobs that can be displayed is reached, the oldest job is deleted each time a  
new job is added.  
Checking Send Job Details  
You can check the detailed information of any send job, such as the destination and the  
date and time the job was specified.  
4
1
2
3
Select the job whose detailed information  
you want to check.  
Press [Details].  
– If the job that you want to select is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired job.  
– You can cancel TX jobs which are being  
sent or waiting to be sent by pressing  
[Cancel] in [TX Job Status]. For more  
information, see “Using the System Monitor  
Screen,” on p. 4‑91.  
5
6
Check the details of the selected  
job.  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
4‑97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4‑98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving Documents  
The following shows how the machine operates when it receives a fax or I-fax  
document.  
For advanced receiving features, see Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,in the  
Reference Guide.  
1
2
When documents are being  
received, the Processing/Data  
indicator on the control panel  
flashes a green light.  
– The Processing/Data indicator flashes or  
maintains a steady green light even when  
the machine enters the Sleep mode.  
– The Error indicator flashes a red light when  
either the amount of available memory  
is low or paper needs to be loaded into a  
paper drawer.  
3
The document is printed.  
The Processing/Data indicator goes out when  
documents stored in memory are printed.  
– If there is no paper on which the received  
document can be printed, the received  
document is stored in memory.  
– Documents which have been stored in  
memory because the paper has run out,  
are automatically printed when paper is  
loaded into a paper drawer.  
When document reception is  
complete, the Processing/Data  
indicator on the control panel  
maintains a steady green light.  
This indicates that documents are  
stored in memory.  
– If a printing error occurs, the Error indicator  
flashes a red light.  
5‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Canceling RX Jobs  
You can select and cancel a fax job that is currently being received.  
1
– If the job that you want to cancel is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired job.  
– You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel  
them all at once. Select and cancel one job  
at a time.  
– You cannot erase a document that is being  
printed.  
– If you select a document that is being  
received, [Erase] changes to [Cancel],  
enabling you to cancel receiving the  
document.  
2
3
4
5
If you do not want to cancel the job, press  
[No].  
The message <Canceling...> appears for  
approximately two seconds on the touch  
panel display.  
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No  
Good) on the Log screen.  
Select the job that you want to cancel.  
Press [Cancel].  
5‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
5‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking RX Jobs  
System monitor enables you to view the reception results, and monitor the status of  
the receive jobs.  
Checking the Status of Fax Jobs  
This section describes how to check the status of fax jobs.  
– The maximum number of received fax jobs that are displayed is 90 jobs.  
– When the maximum number of jobs that can be displayed is reached, the oldest job is deleted each time a  
new job is added.  
Checking Received Fax Job Details  
1
2
3
4
Select the job whose detailed information  
you want to check.  
Press [Details].  
If the job that you want to select is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired job.  
5‑5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
6
Check the details of the selected  
job.  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
5‑6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking the Status of Receive Jobs (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)  
You can check the contents of received documents stored in memory as well as the status of  
receive jobs.  
– If Job Log Display in System Settings is set to [Off], [RX Job Report] is not displayed on the System Monitor  
screen.  
– Up to 128 documents for the total of send and receive jobs combined can be displayed on the job log  
(Activity Report (RX)) screen.  
Checking Receive Job Details  
You can check the detailed information of any received job, such as the destination and the  
date and time the job was received.  
3
4
1
2
Select the job whose detailed information  
you want to check.  
Press [Details].  
If the job that you want to select is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired job.  
5‑7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
6
Check the details of the selected  
job.  
Press [Done] repeatedly until  
the Send Basic Features screen  
appears.  
5‑8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing the Receive Job Log (Activity Report)  
You can print the receive job log (Activity Report (RX)).  
1
The Receive Job Log can be printed only if  
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR paper (plain or  
recycled paper) is loaded in the paper sources  
whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility  
For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the  
Additional Functions screen) are set to [On].  
Drawer Switching,” on p. 2‑25.)  
2
3
4
5
6
To cancel printing, press [No].  
The Activity Report (RX) is printed.  
5‑9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking the Arrival of I-Fax Jobs  
The machine regularly checks for the arrival of an I‑fax. However, you can check for the  
arrival of an I‑fax at any time by performing the procedure below.  
4
5
1
2
3
To be able to use [Check RX I‑Fax Job], you  
must first set the POP (Post Office Protocol)  
setting in E‑mail/I‑Fax in Network Settings  
in System Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen) to [On], so that you  
can receive documents using POP. (See  
Chapter 6, “Network (imageCLASS MF7480/  
MF7470 Only),” in the Reference Guide.)  
5‑10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Available Paper Sizes  
When received documents are printed, they are printed from the paper drawer that  
has the same size paper as the received document. If all of the settings in Select  
Cassette in RX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings are  
set to [On], and paper of the correct size is not available, the machine automatically  
selects a different paper size in the following order. The paper size is automatically  
selected in the same order, even if paper runs out during printing.  
Available Paper Sizes for Received Documents  
11" x 17" originals  
LGL originals  
11" x 17" LGL* LTR* STMT x 2  
LGL LTR* 11" x 17" STMT x 3  
LTR LGL 11" x 17"STMT x 2  
STMT LTR LGL 11" x 17"  
LTR originals  
STMT originals  
* Received documents are automatically reduced or separated before being printed on the  
paper size indicated.  
– The order of paper selection may differ depending on the resolution set on the sending party’s machine.  
– Received documents can be printed on the following paper sizes and paper types:  
– Paper Sizes: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or STMTR  
– Paper Types: plain or recycled  
– You can specify any paper drawer to receive fax/I‑fax documents. The default setting is [On], except for the  
stack bypass.  
– You can set the machine to reduce received documents by 75%, 90%, 95%, or 97% if the document is larger  
than any of the available paper sizes. (See Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)  
– You can change the order of paper selection. (See Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference  
Guide.)  
– You can set the machine to print received documents on both sides of the paper. (See Chapter 4, “Sending  
and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)  
– Received documents are output face down, in the order in which the pages are received.  
5‑11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5‑12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Documents  
Follow this procedure to print a document from your computer.  
Make sure that the printer driver is installed. To check if the driver is installed, see  
“Installing Software,in the Starter Guide.  
For details on printer driver settings, see the PCL Driver Guide and the UFR II Driver  
Guide.  
How to display the print screen or items on the screen may vary depending on your application and/or OS.  
Start the Print Command  
Select the Printer  
From an open document on an  
application, click [File] > [Print].  
Select the printer icon for the  
machine ([Canon MF7400 Series UFRII  
LT], [Canon MF7400 Series PCL5e]* ,  
[Canon MF7400 Series PCL6]* ), then  
1
1
click [Preferences] or [Properties] to  
open the dialog box.  
1
*
Only for users of the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.  
6‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adjust Preferences  
Print the Document  
After finished setting, click [OK].  
Click [Print] or [OK].  
You want to cancel printing:  
See “Canceling Print Jobs,”on p. 6‑5.  
6‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Use the following figures as a guideline to decide whether paper should be specified as Plain Paper or Heavy  
Paper.  
– Plain Paper: 17 to 22 lb bond (64 to 80 g/m2)  
– Heavy Paper 1: 22 to 24 lb bond (81 to 90 g/m2)  
– Heavy Paper 2: 24 to 28 lb bond (91 to 105 g/m2)  
– Heavy Paper 3: 28 to 32 lb bond (106 to 128 g/m2)  
– Canon transparency film is recommended for printing on transparencies.  
– Canon label paper is recommended for printing on labels.  
– Heavy Paper (2, 3), Transparency, Labels, and Envelope cannot be printed using two‑sided printing.  
– Two‑sided printing can use either the paper drawer or the stack bypass in sizes of 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR,  
STMTR, EXEC, A3, JIS‑B4, A4, A4R, JIS‑B5, JIS‑B5R, and A5R.  
– Two‑sided printing can use paper within the following range:  
– 17 to 24 lb bond (64 to 90 g/m2)  
– When printing on letterhead paper, or paper with a Logo (such as a cover sheet), please note the following:  
– If the paper is fed from a paper drawer, the machine starts printing on the side of paper loaded facing  
down.  
– If the paper is fed from the stack bypass, the machine starts printing on the side of paper loaded facing up.  
– When a job is being processed, the Processing/Data indicator blinks green.  
6‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Canceling Print Jobs  
You can cancel the current print jobs.  
Using the System Monitor Screen  
You can cancel a print job while it is being print.  
1
2
3
4
Select the copy job that you want to  
cancel.  
If the job that you want to cancel is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired job.  
Press [Cancel].  
You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel  
them all at once. You may only select and  
cancel one job at a time.  
6‑5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
The message <Canceling...> appears for  
approximately two seconds on the touch  
panel display.  
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No  
Good) on the Log screen.  
6‑6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Print Jobs  
System monitor enables you to monitor the status of the print jobs currently being  
processed.  
Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is turned off, all  
print jobs are erased from the memory.  
Checking the Status of Print Jobs  
You can check the details of copy and print jobs, such as the date and time the machine  
received and processed the jobs, and the number of pages.  
If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [Off], the following items  
are not displayed on the System Monitor Screen:  
– Copy, Send, Fax job logs, and Print job logs  
3
1
2
Press [Status] or [Log].  
6‑7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Select the job whose detailed information  
you want to check.  
Press [Details].  
If the job that you want to check is not  
displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the  
desired job.  
The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No  
Good) on the Log screen.  
5
6
Check the detailed information.  
Press [Done] repeatedly until the  
Basic Features screen appears.  
6‑8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning to a Computer  
Follow this procedure to scan an original to your computer.  
Make sure that Color Network ScanGear is installed. To check if Color Network  
ScanGear is installed, see “Installing Software,in the Starter Guide.  
For details on the Color Network ScanGear settings, see the Color Network ScanGear  
Users Guide.  
Enter the Scan Mode  
Place Your Originals  
Place the first page on the platen  
glass if you are not using the feeder.  
For Originals you can fax, see “Original Requirements,”  
on p. 2‑2.  
SCAN  
Press  
(SCAN).  
The SCAN indicator lights up and the machine enters scan  
standby mode.  
7‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Set Scan Function  
Start Scanning  
In the [Main] sheet, select [Platen] for  
[Original Placement].  
Click the [Scan] button.  
You want to cancel scanning:  
During scanning, a dialog box showing  
the scanning progress appears. To cancel  
scanning, click the [Cancel] button in that  
dialog box.  
7‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switching the Scanner Online and Offline  
To start Color Network ScanGear and scan, first you must switch the scanner online.  
Switching the Scanner Online  
Switching the scanner online enables communications with other devices on the network,  
and allows the scanner to receive data from the computer.  
Follow the procedure below to switch the scanner online.  
SCAN  
1
2
Press  
(SCAN).  
When the following display appears, the  
scanner is online.  
7‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Switching the Scanner Offline  
After scanning over the network, disconnect the scanner from the network by switching it  
offline in order to use other functions.  
The procedure for switching the scanner offline depends on whether or not scanning is in  
progress.  
You do not have to switch the scanner offline in order to use other functions while data is being transferred.  
Switching Offline When Scanning is not in Progress  
1
When the following display appears, the  
scanner is offline.  
7‑5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Switching Offline When Scanning is in Progress  
1
2
After a few seconds, scanning is interrupted  
and the following display appears, indicating  
that the scanner is offline.  
Press [No] to cancel if you decide not to  
switch the scanner offline.  
7‑6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Canceling Scan Jobs  
Cancel an ongoing job as follows.  
Using the System Monitor Screen  
During scanning, a dialog box showing the scanning progress appears.  
1
7‑7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7‑8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PC Faxing  
Follow this procedure to send a fax from your computer.  
Make sure that the fax driver is installed. To check if the driver is installed, see  
“Installing Software,in the Starter Guide.  
For details on fax driver settings, see the Fax Driver Guide.  
How to display the print screen or items on the screen may vary depending on your application and/or OS.  
Start the Print Command  
Select the Fax  
From an open document on an  
application, click [File] > [Print].  
Select the fax icon ([Canon MF7400  
Series (FAX)]), then click [Print] or  
[OK].  
You want to adjust the fax properties:  
Click [Preferences] or [Properties] and  
adjust the settings.  
8‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Set the Destination  
Send the Document  
Specify the name and fax number in  
[Sending Settings], then click [Add to  
Recipient List].  
Click [OK] in the Fax Sending Settings.  
You want to send a fax with a cover  
sheet:  
Click the [Cover Sheet] tab and set the  
format for the cover sheet attachment.  
You want to cancel sending a fax:  
on p. 4‑91.  
8‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote UI  
Follow this procedure for Remote UI management.  
For details, see Chapter 7, “Remote UI (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only), in the  
Reference Guide.  
Prepare the Network  
Startup  
Set up the machine for use in a  
network, then connect the machine  
and the PC to your network router or  
a hub.  
Start the web browser, enter the IP  
address of the machine, then press  
[Enter] on the keyboard.  
For details, see “Set the Machine for Network Usage,” in  
the Starter Guide.  
9‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Log on  
Operate the Machine  
I
Select the user mode, then click [OK].  
Now you can manage the machine on  
the web browser.  
For details, see Chapter 7, “Remote UI (imageCLASS  
MF7480/ MF7470 Only),” in the Reference Guide.  
9‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Machine  
Note the following before cleaning your machine:  
– Make sure no document is stored in memory, then turn off the main power switch  
and disconnect the power cord.  
– Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components.  
– Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning; they can  
stick to the components or generate static charges.  
Never use volatile liquids such as thinners, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean the  
machine. These can damage the machine components.  
Exterior  
1
2
Turn off the main power switch  
and disconnect the power cord.  
Wipe the machine's exterior  
with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth  
dampened with water or diluted  
dishwashing detergent solution.  
3
Wait for the machine to dry, then  
reconnect the power cord and turn  
on the main power switch.  
10‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fixing Unit  
If black streaks appear on the printed page, the fixing unit in the main unit may be dirty.  
Should this occur, use the Fixing Unit Cleaning function to clean the fixing unit. The fixing  
unit should also be cleaned each time the cartridge is replaced. Print the cleaning pattern  
on LTR paper for cleaning the fixing unit.  
4
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
The cleaning paper is printed. You will use  
this paper as the cleaning paper.  
5
Open the stack bypass.  
3
10‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
Load the cleaning paper with the  
printed side facing up, inserting  
the white edge into the stack  
bypass first.  
9
While the fixing unit is being cleaned, the  
screen below appears.  
7
8
– Cleaning the fixing unit takes  
approximately 100 seconds.  
– The cleaning process cannot be canceled.  
Please wait until it is completed.  
The display returns to the Adjustment/  
Cleaning screen.  
Select [LTR].  
Press [Next].  
10  
11  
Select [Plain].  
Press [OK].  
The cleaning paper is printed.  
10‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Load the cleaning paper with the  
printed side facing down, inserting  
the white edge into the stack  
bypass first.  
13  
14  
Repeat steps 7 to 9 to clean the  
fixing unit.  
Press [Done] repeatedly until the  
Basic Features screen appears.  
Discard the cleaning sheets after use.  
10‑5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning Area  
Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent.  
Platen Glass and Underside of the Feeder  
When cleaning the machine, first turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord. Failure to  
observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
If the platen glass or the underside of the feeder is dirty, the original may not be scanned clearly, or the size of  
the original may be detected incorrectly.  
1
Clean the platen glass and the  
underside of the feeder with a  
cloth dampened with water, and  
then wipe them clean with a soft,  
dry cloth.  
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as  
this may damage the original or break the  
machine.  
10‑6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manual Feeder Cleaning  
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder,  
this may be caused by pencil writing rubbing off the originals and onto the roller. Perform  
this feeder cleaning procedures to clean the feeder scanning area, film, and rollers.  
When cleaning the machine, first turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord. Failure to  
observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.  
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine.  
– If the feeder scanning area is dirty, it may result in a paper jam or blemished print output.  
– Spin the rollers while cleaning them.  
1
2
Open the feeder cover.  
3
Open the inner cover (A), holding it  
by its front tab.  
Clean the rollers (a total of three  
places) inside the feeder cover  
with a cloth dampened with water.  
Then wipe the area with a soft, dry  
cloth.  
4
Clean the rollers (A) inside the  
inner cover with a cloth dampened  
with water. Then wipe the area  
with a soft, dry cloth.  
10‑7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
6
Clean the transparent plastic part  
of the inner cover with a cloth  
dampened with water. Then wipe  
the area with a soft, dry cloth.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
8
9
Open the feeder.  
Clean the feeder scanning area (A)  
and the document feeding roller  
(B), with a cloth dampened with  
water. Then wipe the area with a  
soft, dry cloth.  
Close the inner cover.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
7
Close the feeder cover.  
10‑8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Close the feeder.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Automatic Feeder Cleaning  
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder,  
clean the rollers of the feeder by repeatedly feeding blank sheets of paper through it.  
It takes approximately 20 seconds to clean the feeder.  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
3
10‑9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Place 10 sheets of blank LTR paper into the  
feeder, then press [OK].  
While the feeder is being cleaned, the  
screen below appears.  
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the  
Basic Features screen appears.  
10‑10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transfer Roller  
If the backside of the printed paper is smudged, the transcription roller in the main unit  
may be dirty. Should this occur, use the Transfer Roller Cleaning function to clean the  
transcription roller.  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
4
While the transfer roller is being cleaned, the  
screen below appears.  
3
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the  
Basic Features screen appears.  
10‑11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge  
Originals can be stamped to indicate that they have been sent. Replace the stamp  
cartridge when this mark is faint or no longer visible.  
When replacing the stamp cartridge, take care not to allow ink to come in contact with your hands or clothing. If  
ink gets onto your hands or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water.  
3
Insert a new stamp cartridge into  
the feeder using the tweezers until  
it clicks.  
1
Open the feeder cover, then open  
the inner cover (B) by holding its  
front tab for removing the old  
stamp cartridge (A).  
– Set the stamp cartridge so that the two  
projections on the cartridge are aligned  
with the hollows on the feeder.  
– Be careful that the stamping surface of the  
stamp cartridge does not protrude.  
– Insert the stamp cartridge properly, or it  
may cause paper jams.  
2
Remove the old stamp cartridge  
using the tweezers.  
Widen the tweezers if necessary.  
10‑12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Gently close the inner cover and  
the feeder cover until it clicks.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
10‑13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Cartridge  
When the machine runs out of toner, the following screen appears on the touch panel  
display.  
When this happens, remove the cartridge from the machine and slowly shake it  
sideways to redistribute toner.  
Reinstall the cartridge in the machine and print out a test page. If the error message  
still appears, follow the instructions shown on the screen and replace the cartridge.  
If you press [Recover Later], you can continue operations, such as setting modes and  
scanning originals, without replacing the cartridge immediately.  
– Do not burn or throw used cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the  
cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.  
– Do not store cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in  
burns or a fire.  
– When discarding used cartridges, put the cartridges in a bag to prevent the toner remaining inside the  
cartridges from scattering, and dispose of them in a location away from open flames.  
– Do not touch the rollers and parts which have labels “CAUTION! Hot surface avoid contact” on. They become  
very hot during use.  
– Keep toner out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested, consult a physician immediately.  
– Take care not to allow toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing. If toner gets onto your hands  
or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water. Washing it off with warm water will set the toner, and  
make it impossible to remove the toner stains.  
– When you are replacing a cartridge, be sure to use a cartridge designed for this product.  
– Do not replace cartridge until the message prompting you to do so appears.  
– Do not attempt to replace the cartridge while the machine is printing.  
– Complete instructions on how to replace the cartridge can be accessed by pressing [Previous] or [Next] on the  
touch panel display.  
– If the toner runs out during a print job, the machine will start printing the remaining pages automatically after  
you replace the cartridge.  
10‑14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
Press the button on the left cover  
of the main unit, and open the left  
cover.  
3
4
Rotate the unlock lever until it  
clicks.  
Make sure that the (down arrow) on the  
lever is aligned with the (up arrow) of the  
(Unlock) icon position before proceeding.  
While grasping the handle of the  
cartridge holder, pull the cartridge  
holder out of the machine until it  
stops.  
2
Open the front cover.  
10‑15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
6
While grasping the handle of the  
cartridge, remove the cartridge  
from the cartridge holder.  
7
8
Remove the desiccant bag and the  
shipping tape.  
Place the cartridge on a flat  
surface, and remove only the short  
shipping tape affixed on both  
other sides of the cartridge.  
Lift the cartridge straight up.  
Remove the new cartridge from  
the protective bag.  
9
Remove the packing materials.  
Save the protective bag. You may need it  
later when you remove the cartridge from the  
machine.  
10‑16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
11  
Hold the cartridge, shake it gently  
five or six times from side to side,  
then back and forth to evenly  
distribute the toner inside.  
– Pull out the sealing tape completely  
from the cartridge. If the sealing tape  
remains in the cartridge, it may result in a  
deterioration in print quality.  
– Dispose of the sealing tape according to  
local regulations.  
12  
13  
Place the cartridge on a flat  
surface, and remove the long  
shipping tape affixed on both  
sides of the cartridge.  
Pull out the sealing tape  
completely in the direction of the  
arrow in the illustration below  
while supporting the cartridge.  
Pull the sealing tape straight out.  
Remove the protective cover by  
pulling its tab.  
– If the sealing tape is pulled out forcefully  
or stopped at midpoint, toner may leak. If  
toner gets into your eyes or mouth, rinse  
it out immediately with cold water and  
consult a physician.  
– If loose toner comes into contact with your  
skin or clothing, wash with cold water.  
Warm water will set the toner.  
10‑17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
15  
While grasping the handle of the  
new cartridge, insert the cartridge  
into the cartridge holder.  
16  
17  
Rotate the lever to the locked  
position.  
Make sure that the (down arrow) on the  
lever is aligned with the (right arrow) of  
Use only the cartridge recommended for use  
in this machine.  
the  
(Lock) icon position.  
Close the front cover.  
While grasping the handle of  
the cartridge holder, push the  
cartridge holder in the machine as  
far as it will go.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
10‑18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
Gently close the left cover of the  
main unit until it clicks by placing  
your hand on the hand symbol  
located on the left cover.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
10‑19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recycling Used Cartridges  
Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges  
called “The Clean Earth Campaign. This program preserves precious  
natural resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the  
used cartridges that are of no further use, to remanufacture new  
cartridges which, at the same time, keeps the environment cleaner  
by reducing landfill waste. Complete details concerning this program  
are enclosed in each Cartridge box.  
The Clean Earth Campaign  
THE Canon CARTRIDGE RECYCLING PROGRAM  
The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program fulfills the first initiative of Canon’s Clean Earth  
Campaign, which supports four critical environmental areas:  
Recycling in the Workplace  
Conserving Environmental Resources  
Scientific Research and Education  
Encouraging Outdoors Appreciation  
The remaining “Clean Earthinitiatives are supported in the U.S. through sponsorships of  
the National Park Foundation, the National Wildlife Federation, and The Nature Conservancy  
and in Canada through donations to the World Wildlife Fund Canada and The Nature  
Conservancy of Canada.  
10‑20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program has collected huge amount  
of cartridges that otherwise would have been discarded into landfills or similar facilities.  
Instead, this rapidly growing program returns used cartridges to the manufacturing  
process, thus conserving an array of resources.  
Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further  
use, simply follow the instructions detailed for U.S. or Canadian residents.  
We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program.  
Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet.  
Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled.  
You are not entitled to a tax deduction or rebate for the return of empty cartridges.  
This program may be modified or discontinued without notice.  
10‑21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U.S.A. PROGRAM  
Packaging  
Option A-1: Single Box Return  
Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end‑blocks from  
the new cartridge’s box.  
Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.  
Option B: Volume Box Return  
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.  
Place as many cartridges as possible into one box.  
Carefully seal the box with tape;  
or  
Call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive your free eight cartridge collection box.  
10‑22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Option A-2: Multiple Box Return  
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.  
Complete Option A‑1.  
Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape.  
Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications.  
Maximum weight = 70 lb. (31.8 kg)  
Maximum length = 108 in. (2,743 mm)  
Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130 in. (3,302 mm)  
If your shipment exceeds the above limits, please call 1-800-OK-Canon for special  
shipping information.  
Please Note:  
Do not send defective cartridges for replacement.  
Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or  
service facility as provided in the warranty.  
10‑23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shipping  
Apply the UPS authorized returning label provided in this guide.  
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii: Do not use the UPS authorized returning label. For Alaska  
and Hawaii Canon set up alternative mail service with the U.S. Postal Service.  
Please call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive U.S. Postal Service merchandise returning label.  
Option: UPS Pick-up  
Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery;  
or  
Take the shipment to your local UPS receiving point.  
10‑24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME  
Option A: Single Box Return  
Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end‑blocks from  
the new cartridge’s box.  
Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.  
Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon’s  
labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.  
Deposit your empty cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local  
Canada Post outlet or franchise.  
Option B: Volume Box Return (eight or more cartridges)  
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.  
Call 1-800-667-2666 to receive your free Canon collection box kit.  
The collection box can accommodate eight individual cartridge boxes.  
Place your eight individually packaged boxes of empty cartridges into the Canon  
collection box. Seal the box.  
10‑25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure.  
Canon’s labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.  
Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial  
pick‑up agreement with Canada Post may have their collection box picked up.  
Working to preserve endangered species is a long‑standing Canon interest.  
To this end, for every cartridge collected, Canon Canada donates $1, shared equally  
between World Wildlife Fund Canada and the Nature Conservancy of Canada. This  
donation is utilized in Canada.  
For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please call or write  
to Canon.  
1-800-667-2666  
Canon Canada Inc.  
Corporate Customer Relations  
6390 Dixie Road  
Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7  
10‑26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Consumables  
The following consumables and accessories are available from Canon. For more  
information, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care  
Center.  
We recommend that you order the following consumables from Canon Authorized  
Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center before your stock runs out.  
Paper Stock  
In addition to plain paper (11" x 17", LGL, LTR, and STMT), recycled paper, color paper,  
transparencies (recommended for this machine), labels, and other types of paper stock are  
available. For more information, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon  
Customer Care Center.  
Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the paper to ignite and result in burns or  
a fire.  
– For high‑quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.  
– To prevent moisture build‑up, tightly wrap any remaining paper in its original package for storage.  
– Some commercially available paper types are not suited for this machine. Contact Canon Authorized Service  
Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center when you need to purchase paper.  
10‑27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cartridge  
If a message prompting you to replace the cartridge appears on the touch panel display,  
replace the used cartridge with a new one.  
When you are replacing a cartridge, be sure to use a cartridge designed for this product.  
– Never dispose cartridges in a fire or incinerator, as this may result in an explosion.  
– Do not store cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner to ignite and result in  
burns or a fire.  
Keep cartridge and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these items are ingested, consult a  
physician immediately.  
– Store cartridges in a cool location, away from direct sunlight. (The recommended storage conditions are:  
temperatures below 86°F (30°C), and humidity below 80%.)  
– Never store the cartridges in a vertical position.  
Stamp Cartridge  
The stamp cartridge is used to stamp originals. Use only the stamp cartridges  
recommended for use on this machine.  
10‑28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Jams  
If a paper jam occurs, the screen indicating the location of the paper jam and  
instructions on how to clear the paper jam appears on the touch panel display. This  
screen repeatedly appears on the touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely  
cleared. A black circle on the screen indicates the location of the paper jam.  
When you press [Recover Later], you can continue operations, such as setting modes  
and scanning originals, without removing the jammed paper immediately.  
Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:  
– Fan and tap the paper stack on a flat surface before loading it in the machine.  
– Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use. (See “Paper  
Requirements,on p. 2-11.)  
– Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from the inside of the machine.  
– Make sure that the paper-size detecting lever located on the left side of a paper  
drawer matches the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer. (See “Set Up the  
Machine,in the Starter Guide.)  
– There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high‑voltages. When removing jammed paper  
or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to  
touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.  
– The fixing unit, the duplex unit, and their surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use.  
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing unit,  
the duplex unit, and their surroundings, as doing so may result in burns.  
– When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the originals or  
paper.  
– When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or  
injure yourself on the parts on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, please contact  
Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center.  
11‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
– When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the  
jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If  
they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner  
and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.  
– When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to  
prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into  
your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.  
– After clearing all paper jams, remove your hands from the machine immediately. Even if the machine is not  
in operation, your hands, hair, or clothing may get caught in the feed rollers, which could result in personal  
injury or damage if the machine suddenly starts printing.  
– Do not force a jammed original or paper out of the machine. Contact Canon Customer Care Center if needed.  
– When a paper jam occurs in the feeder, you cannot continue operating the machine. Follow the instructions  
on the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. (See “Feeder,” on p. 11‑5.)  
– If paper is jammed in several locations, remove the jammed paper in the order indicated on the touch panel  
display.  
1
Inspect all paper jam locations  
indicated on the touch panel  
display, and remove any jammed  
paper.  
See the appropriate pages below for  
instructions on finding and removing  
jammed paper. Or, you can follow the  
instructions on the touch panel display.  
If jammed paper tears while it is being  
removed, be sure to remove any remaining  
pieces from inside the machine.  
Feeder (See “Feeder,” on p. 11‑5.)  
Stack Bypass (See “Stack Bypass,” on  
p. 11‑7.)/Fixing Unit (See “Fixing Unit  
Duplex Unit (See “Duplex Unit,” on  
p. 11‑11.)  
– If the machine’s power is turned off when  
there is a paper jam, detection of paper  
jams in the paper drawers is not possible  
after the power is turned back on. Clear  
paper jams without turning the power off.  
– Some areas that are shown to have paper  
jams may not actually have paper jams.  
However, always check all locations  
indicated on the touch panel display in the  
order that is given.  
Paper Drawer 1 (See “Paper Drawer 1,” on  
p. 11‑13.)  
Paper Drawer 2 (See “Paper Drawer 2,” on  
p. 11‑15.)  
2
After you have removed all of the  
jammed paper in the locations  
indicated on the touch panel  
display, restore all levers and  
covers to their original positions.  
– When paper is jammed in several locations,  
the following image with the black circles  
appears on the screen.  
11‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Continue to follow the procedure  
and instructions on the touch  
panel display.  
Once you have cleared all of the jammed  
paper in locations other than the feeder,  
printing or copying resumes.  
If there is paper that still needs to be  
removed, a screen indicating how to clear  
that paper jam appears on the touch panel  
display. Repeat the procedure from step 1.  
You do not have to re‑enter the number  
of copies or prints, even if you are printing  
multiple sets. The machine automatically  
recalculates the number of copies or prints  
to make based on the number of sheets that  
have jammed.  
11‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feeder  
If a paper jam occurs in the feeder, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on  
the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure  
described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the  
jammed paper.  
1
2
Open the feeder cover.  
3
4
Open the inner cover (A), holding it  
by its front tab.  
Remove any jammed originals.  
Turn the feed dial and remove any  
jammed originals.  
Do not pull the jammed original forcefully.  
Doing so may tear the original.  
11‑5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7
8
Open the feeder and remove any  
jammed originals.  
If you cannot remove the original, proceed to  
step 5.  
5
6
Close the inner cover.  
Close the feeder.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Close the feeder cover.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
9
Follow the instructions on the  
touch panel display.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
The screen indicating the location of the  
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch  
panel display until the paper jam is entirely  
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing  
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.  
11‑6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stack Bypass  
If a paper jam occurs inside the stack bypass, a screen similar to the one shown below  
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the  
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to  
remove the jammed paper.  
3
Follow the instructions on the  
touch panel display.  
1
2
Remove all paper from the stack  
bypass.  
Remove any jammed paper.  
The screen indicating the location of the  
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch  
panel display until the paper jam is entirely  
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing  
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.  
If you cannot remove the jammed paper,  
follow the procedures described in “Fixing  
11‑7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fixing Unit (Inside the Main Unit)  
If a paper jam occurs in the fixing unit area, a screen similar to the one shown below  
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the  
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to  
remove the jammed paper.  
1
Press the button on the left cover  
of the main unit, and open the left  
cover.  
2
Push down the green fixing lever.  
The parts located around the exit slot guide  
and the fixing unit are subject to high  
temperatures. When removing jammed  
paper, take care not to touch anything in this  
area except the lever.  
11‑8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Use the green tab to lift up the exit  
slot cover and remove any jammed  
paper.  
5
Remove any jammed paper that is  
protruding from the lower part of  
the fixing unit.  
The parts inside the fixing unit are subject to  
high‑temperatures. When removing jammed  
paper, take care not to touch anything in this  
area, except the upper cover.  
4
While holding down the lever on  
the right corner of the fixing unit,  
open the upper cover of the fixing  
unit and remove any jammed  
paper.  
6
Push up the green fixing lever.  
11‑9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Place your hand where the hand  
symbol ( ) is located on the left  
cover of the main unit, and then  
gently close the left cover until  
it clicks into place in the closed  
position.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
8
Follow the instructions on the  
touch panel display.  
The screen indicating the location of the  
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch  
panel display until the paper jam is entirely  
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing  
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.  
11‑10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Duplex Unit  
If a paper jam occurs inside the duplex unit, a screen similar to the one shown below  
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the  
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to  
remove the jammed paper.  
1
Press the button on the left cover  
of the main unit, and open the left  
cover.  
2
Remove any jammed paper.  
Some parts of the duplex unit are subject to  
high temperature. When removing jammed  
paper, take care not to touch anything in this  
unit.  
11‑11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
When removing the jammed paper from the  
bottom of the duplex unit, pull the jammed  
paper slightly toward the inside. Do not pull  
the jammed paper right below.  
3
Place your hand where the hand  
symbol ( ) is located on the left  
cover of the main unit, and then  
gently close the left cover until  
it clicks into place in the closed  
position.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
4
Follow the instructions on the  
touch panel display.  
The screen indicating the location of the  
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch  
panel display until the paper jam is entirely  
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing  
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.  
11‑12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Drawer 1  
If a paper jam occurs inside the paper drawer 1, a screen similar to the one shown below  
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the  
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to  
remove the jammed paper.  
2
3
Open the paper drawers left cover.  
1
Press the button on the left cover  
of the main unit, and open the left  
cover.  
Remove any jammed paper.  
11‑13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Pull out the paper drawer and  
remove any jammed paper.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
7
Place your hand where the hand  
symbol ( ) is located on the left  
cover of the main unit, and then  
gently close the left cover until  
it clicks into place in the closed  
position.  
Gently push the paper drawer back  
into the machine until it clicks into  
place in the closed position.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
8
Follow the instructions on the  
touch panel display.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
The screen indicating the location of the  
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch  
panel display until the paper jam is entirely  
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing  
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.  
6
Close the paper drawers left cover.  
11‑14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Drawer 2  
If a paper jam occurs inside the paper drawer 2, a screen similar to the one shown below  
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the  
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to  
remove the jammed paper.  
3
Pull out the paper drawer and  
remove any jammed paper.  
1
2
Open the paper drawers left cover.  
Remove any jammed paper.  
11‑15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Gently push the paper drawer back  
into the machine until it clicks into  
place in the closed position.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Close the paper drawers left cover.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
6
Follow the instructions on the  
touch panel display.  
The screen indicating the location of the  
paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch  
panel display until the paper jam is entirely  
cleared. For more information, see “Clearing  
Jams,” on p. 11‑2.  
11‑16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Messages  
If the machine displays a self-diagnostic error message, follow the instructions on the  
touch panel display.  
Self-diagnostic error messages appear on the touch panel display when:  
scanning or printing cannot be performed because of an operational error.  
you need to make a decision or take some action during scanning, copying, or  
printing.  
you need to make a decision or take some action while browsing the network  
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only).  
The following is a list of self-diagnostic error messages, along with their possible  
causes and remedies.  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Cannot connect to the  
selected server. Check the  
settings.  
(imageCLASS MF7480/  
MF7470 Only)  
Cannot connect to the  
specified IP address/port.  
Check the Gateway Address  
setting in IPv4 Address  
Settings in TCP/IP Settings in  
Network Settings in System  
Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen). (See “Set the  
Machine for Network Usage  
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470  
Only),” in the Starter Guide.)  
Cannot find the selected  
server. Check the settings.  
(imageCLASS MF7480/  
MF7470 Only)  
The IP address that the  
machine should connect to  
cannot be determined.  
– Check the DNS (Domain  
Name System) Server  
Settings in TCP/IPv4 or v6 in  
Network Settings in System  
Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen). (See  
“Network (imageCLASS  
MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in  
the Reference Guide.)  
– Check whether the DNS  
(Domain Name System)  
server’s DNS settings are  
correct.  
11‑17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Message  
Check the cable.  
Description  
Action  
The machine and cable are not Turn off the machine, check  
(imageCLASS MF7480/  
MF7470 Only)  
connected properly.  
that the machine is connected  
to the network using the  
proper cable, and then turn the  
machine on.  
Check the TCP/IP.  
(imageCLASS MF7480/  
MF7470 Only)  
The machine’s TCP/IP is not  
operating.  
Check the IP Address Settings  
in Network Settings in System  
Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen). (See  
Chapter 6, “Network  
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470  
Only),” in the Reference  
Guide or “Set the Machine for  
Network Usage (imageCLASS  
MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the  
Starter Guide.)  
Check your document.  
Load Paper.  
Paper or originals are jammed. Remove any jammed paper or  
originals. (See “Clearing Jams,”  
on p. 11‑2, and “Feeder,” on  
p. 11‑5.)  
– The machine has run out of – Load paper. (See “Set Up  
paper. No more prints can  
be made.  
the Machine,” in the Starter  
Guide.)  
– The paper drawer is not  
inserted correctly.  
– Insert the paper drawer  
properly. (See “Set Up the  
Machine,” in the Starter  
Guide.)  
11‑18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
LTR Load paper.  
Description  
Action  
– Load the indicated paper  
size into the machine. If you  
press (Start) while this  
message is displayed, prints  
are made with the currently  
selected paper size.  
The optimum paper size  
selected by the Automatic  
Paper Selection mode is not  
available in the machine.  
– When the message  
continues to be displayed  
even if the indicated paper  
size is loaded, set Drawer  
Eligibility For APS/ADS in  
Common Settings (from the  
Additional Functions screen)  
for that paper drawer to  
[On]. (See “Automatic Paper  
Switching,” on p. 2‑25.)  
No response.  
(imageCLASS MF7480/  
MF7470 Only)  
– The server was not running  
when you tried to send.  
– Check the destination.  
– The network connection  
was lost when you tried to  
send. (Either you could not  
connect to the destination  
or the connection was  
lost before the job could  
complete.)  
– Check the status of the  
network.  
– A TCP/IP error occurred  
when you tried to send an  
e‑mail or I‑fax.  
– Check that the network  
cables and connectors are  
properly connected.  
No response from the server. The specified server settings  
Wait for a while, and try  
Check the settings.  
(imageCLASS MF7480/  
MF7470 Only)  
are incorrect, or the server is  
not turned ON. Alternatively,  
the machine’s TCP/IP resources  
may be low.  
browsing again. If you still fail,  
try selecting another server.  
Out of resources. Wait for  
a moment, then perform  
operation again.  
(imageCLASS MF7480/  
MF7470 Only)  
You cannot browse the  
Wait for a while, and try  
network due to a lack of TCP/IP browsing again.  
resources. This may be because  
documents have just been  
continuously sent or are being  
continuously sent through FTP  
or Windows (SMB).  
11‑19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Place the original on the  
platen glass.  
The specified mode requires  
that the original be placed on  
the platen glass, but there is no  
original on the platen glass.  
Place the original on the platen  
glass.  
Platen Glass is dirty.  
The feeder’s scanning area is  
dirty.  
Clean the feeder’s scanning  
area. (See “Manual Feeder  
Cleaning,” on p. 10‑7.)  
Remove the original from the The machine cannot scan your Remove the original from the  
feeder.  
original using the feeder. An  
original is placed in the feeder  
and on the platen glass.  
feeder.  
Remove the paper from the  
output tray.  
Prints from the previous job  
remain in the output tray.  
Remove the prints remaining  
in the output tray. Printing  
automatically resumes.  
Replace the toner.  
Printing is not possible because Replace the cartridge. (See  
the toner has run out.  
p. 10‑14.)  
Return page 1 to the top, and Scanning was stopped due to a Arrange the originals in page  
then press the Start key.  
problem with the feeder.  
order with the first page on  
top. Place the originals back  
into the feeder’s original supply  
tray, and press (Start).  
Set the IP Address.  
(imageCLASS MF7480/  
MF7470 Only)  
This machine is not set with an Specify the IP Address Settings  
IP address.  
in TCP/IP Settings in Network  
Settings in System Settings  
(from the Additional Functions  
screen), then turn the  
machine’s main power off and  
back on again. (See Chapter  
6, “Network (imageCLASS  
MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the  
Reference Guide, or “Set the  
Machine for Network Usage  
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470  
Only),” in the Starter Guide.)  
There are too many  
subdirectories.  
You have exceeded the  
maximum number of  
subdirectory levels allowed.  
The directory level that you  
are trying to access cannot be  
specified. Specify a different  
destination.  
11‑20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Codes  
If a job or operation does not complete successfully, check the error code, and  
perform the necessary operations according to the error code displayed. You can  
check the error code on the Details screen when you press [Log] on the System  
Monitor screen. (See “Checking Device Status,on p. 1-24.)  
If a send, receive, or fax job does not complete successfully, the error code is printed  
in the Results column on the Activity Report and TX Report. However, if a send job is  
canceled, “STOP” is printed in the Results column on the TX Report.  
For details on reports, see Chapter 11, “Appendix,in the Reference Guide.  
See the table below for individual error codes.  
Error Code  
#0001  
Description  
Action  
A paper or originals may be jammed. Remove the jammed paper or  
originals.  
#0003  
– An attempt was made to send a  
document of 17 1/8" (432 mm) or  
longer from the feeder.  
– Divide the document into smaller  
parts and send from the platen  
glass.  
– A document takes a long time to  
send because it contains too much  
data.  
– Reduce the scanning resolution  
before sending.  
– A document takes a long time to  
receive.  
– Contact the other party and ask  
them to reduce their scanning  
resolution or divide the document  
into smaller parts for sending.  
11‑21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Error Code  
#0005  
Description  
Action  
– The recipient did not respond  
within 35 seconds.  
– Send the document again. Contact  
the other party and have them  
check their fax machine. If you  
are making an overseas call, add a  
pause to the number.  
– The other party may not be using a – Check with the other party and  
G3 fax machine.  
send the document to a G3 fax  
machine. If the other party does  
not have a G3 fax machine, try  
sending your document using  
a transmission mode the other  
party's fax machine supports.  
#0009  
#0012  
#0018  
The paper has run out or the paper  
drawer is not set properly.  
Load the paper or insert the paper  
drawer properly.  
You could not send because the other Contact the other party and ask them  
party's fax machine is out of paper.  
to load the paper.  
– The recipient’s machine did not  
respond when your machine  
retried sending documents.  
– Confirm that the recipient’s  
machine is able to communicate,  
and try again.  
– The documents could not be sent  
because the recipient’s machine  
was busy.  
– Confirm that the recipient’s  
machine is able to communicate,  
and try again.  
– The settings on your machine do  
not match the settings on the  
recipient’s machine.  
– Confirm that the recipient’s  
machine is able to communicate,  
and try again.  
– No pause was included in the  
telephone number when sending a  
fax overseas.  
– Insert a pause after the country  
code, or after the fax number of  
the other party, and then dial the  
number again.  
– Change the Long Distance setting  
on the Option screen if you are  
sending documents to destinations  
stored in the Address Book or  
one‑touch buttons. (See “Storing/  
Buttons,” on p. 4‑71.)  
#0037  
The memory is full.  
Print, send, or delete any documents  
stored in memory.  
11‑22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code  
#0059  
Description  
Action  
Your transmission is canceled  
because the number you dialed was  
Check to see that the correct fax  
number is registered on the other  
different from the number registered party’s fax machine.  
on the other party’s fax machine.  
#0701  
The specified Department ID does not Enter the correct Department ID or  
exist, or the password has changed.  
password using  
(numeric keys),  
and try again. (See “Department/User  
ID Management,” on p. 1‑17.)  
#0703  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
The memory for image data is full  
when sending color documents.  
– Wait a few moments, and then try  
sending again after other send jobs  
are complete.  
– Erase documents stored in  
memory. If the machine still does  
not operate normally, turn the  
main power off, and then back on.  
#0705  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
The send operation was interrupted  
because the size of the image  
– Change the setting for the  
Maximum TX Data Size in E‑mail/  
I‑Fax Settings in Communications  
Settings in System Settings (from  
the Additional Functions screen).  
– Select a lower resolution.  
– If you are using I‑fax, decrease  
the number of pages containing  
images that you are sending each  
time, so that you do not exceed the  
Maximum TX Data Size.  
data is larger than that specified in  
Maximum TX Data Size set in E‑mail/  
I‑Fax Settings in Communications  
Settings in System Settings (from the  
Additional Functions screen).  
– Set Divide into Pages to [On] in the  
File Format screen.  
#0749  
You could not execute the job  
because a service call message is  
being displayed.  
Turn the main power off, wait for 10  
seconds, and turn the main power  
back on. If the machine still does not  
work normally, turn the main power  
off, disconnect the machine, and  
contact Canon Authorized Service  
Facilities or the Canon Customer Care  
Center.  
# 0751  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
The server is not functioning. The  
network is down (the server is unable  
to connect to the network or was  
disconnected).  
– Check the recipient’s address.  
– Check that the network is up.  
11‑23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code  
Description  
Action  
#0752  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
– The SMTP server name or POP  
server name for e‑mail or I‑fax is  
not correct, or the server is not  
functioning.  
– Check the SMTP server name,  
domain name, POP server name,  
and e‑mail address in E‑mail/I‑Fax  
in Network Settings in System  
Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen).  
– The domain name or e‑mail  
address may not be set.  
– Check that the SMTP server is  
operating properly.  
– The network is down.  
– Check the network status.  
#0753  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
A TCP/IP error occurred while sending Check the network cables and  
an e‑mail message. (Socket, Select  
error, etc.)  
connectors. If the machine still does  
not operate normally, turn the main  
power off, and then back on.  
#0755  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
– You cannot send jobs because  
TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.  
– Check TCP/IP Settings in Network  
Settings in System Settings (from  
the Additional Functions screen).  
– The IP address is not set.  
– Check TCP/IP Settings in Network  
Settings in System Settings (from  
the Additional Functions screen).  
– When the machine was turned on, – Check TCP/IP Settings in Network  
an IP address was not assigned to  
the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or  
BOOTP server.  
Settings in System Settings (from  
the Additional Functions screen).  
Or wait a while, and then try  
sending again.  
#0801  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
– A timeout error occurred while the – Check that the SMTP server is  
machine was communicating with  
the SMTP server to send an e‑mail  
message.  
functioning normally, or check the  
network status.  
– The SMTP server returned an  
error while trying to connect. The  
destination is not correct. An error  
occurred on the server side during  
transmission to a file server.  
– Check that the SMTP server is  
functioning normally. Check  
the network status. Check the  
destination setting. Check the  
status and setting of the file server.  
11‑24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code  
Description  
Action  
#0802  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
– The name of the SMTP server  
or POP server in E‑mail/I‑Fax  
in Network Settings in System  
Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen) is not correct.  
– Check the name of the SMTP  
server or POP server in E‑mail/I‑  
Fax in Network Settings in System  
Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen).  
– The DNS (Domain Name System)  
server name is not correct.  
– Check the settings in DNS (Domain  
Name System) Server in IPv4  
Settings or IPv6 Settings in TCP/  
IP Settings in Network Settings  
in System Settings (from the  
Additional Functions screen).  
– Connection to the DNS server  
failed.  
– Check that the DNS server is  
functioning normally.  
#0804  
(for the  
You have no permission to access the Change the setting on the server to  
folder.  
enable access to the folder.  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
#0806  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
– An incorrect user name or  
password was specified for the  
sending of a file to a file server.  
– Change the user name or  
password.  
– An incorrect destination was  
specified for the sending of an  
e‑mail message or I‑fax.  
– Check the e‑mail or I‑fax address.  
#0808  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
– A timeout error occurred while the – Check that the FTP server is  
machine was communicating with  
the FTP server.  
functioning normally, or check the  
network status.  
– The FTP server returned an error  
while trying to connect. The  
destination is not correct. An error  
occurred on the server side during  
transmission.  
– Check that the FTP server is  
functioning normally. Check  
the network status. Check the  
destination setting. Check the  
status and setting of the file server.  
#0810  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
– A POP server connection error  
occurred when receiving an I‑fax.  
– The POP server returned an error  
during the connection.  
– A timeout error occurred on the  
server while connecting to the POP  
server.  
Check the POP Server name in  
E‑mail/I‑Fax in Network Settings in  
System Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen). Confirm that the  
POP server is functioning normally.  
Check the network status.  
11‑25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code  
Description  
Action  
#0812  
(for the  
The POP password setting is incorrect. Check the POP Server password in  
E‑mail/I‑Fax in Network Settings in  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
System Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen).  
#0813  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
The POP Server name setting is  
incorrect.  
Check the POP Server name in  
E‑mail/I‑Fax in Network Settings in  
System Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen).  
#0816  
You have reached the quota for the  
number of pages you can copy or  
print.  
Reset or increase the page quota or  
contact your system administrator.  
#0818  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
You have received data that cannot  
be processed (cannot print the  
attached file).  
Check the settings and ask the sender  
to resend the data.  
#0819  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
You have received data that cannot  
be processed (MIME information is  
incorrect).  
Check the settings, and then ask the  
sender to resend the data.  
#0820  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
You have received data that cannot  
be processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is sender to resend the data.  
incorrect).  
Check the settings, and then ask the  
#0821  
(for the  
You have received data that cannot  
be processed (TIFF analysis error).  
Check the settings, and then ask the  
sender to resend the data.  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
#0827  
(for the  
You have received data that cannot  
be processed (contains MIME  
Check the settings, and then ask the  
sender to resend the data.  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
information that is not supported).  
#0828  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
You have received HTML data.  
Ask the sender to use a file format  
other than HTML, and then resend the  
data.  
#0829  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
Data containing more pages than  
the machine can hold in memory is  
received.  
Print the received documents, and ask  
the sender to resend the remaining  
pages.  
11‑26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Code  
Description  
Action  
#0839  
(for the  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
The user name or password for the  
SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)  
in Authentication/Encryption in  
E‑mail/I‑Fax in Network Settings in  
Check the user name and password  
for SMTP Authentication (SMTP  
AUTH) in Authentication/Encryption  
in E‑mail/I‑Fax in Network Settings in  
System Settings (from the Additional System Settings (from the Additional  
Functions screen) is incorrect.  
Functions screen).  
(See Chapter 6, “Network  
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only),”  
in the Reference Guide.)  
#0852  
An error occurred because the main  
power switch was turned off while a  
job was being processed.  
Check to see if the main power switch  
is turned on. Try processing the job  
again, if necessary.  
#0995  
(for the  
Communication reservation is  
cleared.  
If necessary, try again from the  
beginning.  
imageCLASS  
MF7480 only)  
11‑27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning  
If memory becomes full during the scanning of originals, the following screens appear  
on the touch panel display.  
The jobs may not be accepted even if <Avail. Memory> on the [Device] tab of the System Monitor screen has  
not reached zero percent.  
1
Scan the job again when the current job is  
complete.  
11‑28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Service Call Messages  
If a malfunction occurs and the machine cannot operate normally, a screen like the  
one shown below is displayed. Follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel  
display.  
If a message like the one shown below appears, follow the procedure described  
below.  
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.  
Always grasp the power plug portion when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may  
expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the power cord is damaged, this could  
cause an electricity leak and result in a fire or electrical shock.  
– Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is off.  
– If the main power switch is turned off, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.  
– Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately  
60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.  
11‑29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
2
Turn the main power switch off.  
Allow at least 10 seconds before  
turning the main power switch  
back on.  
If the machine still does not  
operate normally, turn the main  
power switch off, and then  
disconnect the power cord from  
the wall outlet. Contact Canon  
Authorized Service Facilities or the  
Canon Customer Care Center.  
When contacting Canon Authorized Service  
Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center,  
check the following:  
– Model name  
– Problems and status of the machine  
– Error code on the touch panel display  
11‑30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
Customer Support (U.S.A.)  
Your machine is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble‑free operation. If  
you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, or  
if you think your machine needs servicing, contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or  
the Canon Customer Care Center at 1‑800‑828‑4040 between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00  
P.M. EST Monday through Friday and 10:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. on Saturday. For interactive  
troubleshooting, e‑mail technical support, the latest driver downloads and answers to  
frequently asked questions you can also visit our support site at www.canontechsupport.  
com.  
Customer Support (Canada)  
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:  
– For interactive troubleshooting, e‑mail technical support, the latest driver downloads and  
answers to frequently asked questions (www.canon.ca)  
– Automated interactive telephone support on most current products 24 hours, 7 days a  
week (1‑800‑652‑2666).  
– Free live technical support 9:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding  
holidays) for products still under warranty (1‑800‑652‑2666)  
– The location of the authorized service facility nearest you (1‑800‑652‑2666) If the  
problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair  
options are available at the time of your call to the Free live technical support number  
above or via the website at www.canon.ca  
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.  
11‑31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Please have the following information ready when you contact Canon:  
– Product name  
– Serial number: Press (Serial No.) to check your number.  
– Place of purchase  
– Nature of problem  
– Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results  
If the machine makes strange noises, emits smoke or odd odor, turn off the main power switch immediately,  
disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities or the Canon Customer Care Center.  
Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself.  
Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty.  
11‑32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Machine Settings  
You can adjust the machine settings from the Additional Functions Menu to customize  
the way the machine works. To see the list of current settings, print out USER'S DATA  
LIST.  
Printing USER'S DATA LIST  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
5
3
4
12‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Accessing the Additional Functions Menu  
– If User ID Management is set to [On], users whose user type is registered as “User” (end user) cannot change  
the System Manager Settings even if there are no System Manager ID and System Password set.  
– If User ID Management is set to [On], users whose user type is registered as “Administrator” can change the  
System Manager Settings by entering the System Manager ID and System Password, or registering the System  
Manager ID and System Password as their user information in advance.  
– Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are never changed when you press (Reset).  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
Select an Additional Functions setting.  
3
4
Press a mode key to specify its settings.  
For details on the setting items, see  
When finished registering the  
settings, press [Done] repeatedly  
until the Basic Features screen  
appears.  
12‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Printer Settings Menu  
The Printer Settings menu enables you to access common features. Below is an abbreviated  
outline of the Printer Settings menu structure. For a detailed description of all Printer  
Settings menu options, see “Printer Settings,on p. 12‑20.  
As an example, the sequence of steps for setting the default number of copies is shown on  
the following pages.  
Depending on the printer personality, some settings are not available. For details on the availability of settings,  
see “Printer Settings,” on p. 12‑20.  
Settings  
Setting Value  
Printer Settings  
DEFAULT PAPERSIZE  
DEFAULT PAPERTYPE  
LTR  
LGL  
COPIES  
PCL SETTINGS  
PAPER SAVE  
ORIENTATION  
FONT NUMBER  
0
91  
RESET PRINTER  
” and “ ” indicate that settings or levels are omitted.  
12‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Press [OK].  
1
2
Press (Additional Functions).  
You can also use  
(numeric keys) to  
enter the value. (The numeric keys are not  
available depending on the Printer Settings  
item.)  
You can change the value by pressing [] or  
[], even if you have entered the value using  
(numeric keys).  
If necessary, repeat this step to specify the  
setting more precisely according to the  
Printer Settings item you have selected.  
You can return to the previous setting item  
screen by pressing [Done].  
The next setting item screen is displayed.  
3
Press [] or [] to select <COPIES>.  
6
7
Repeat steps 3 to 5 to specify all  
the Printer Settings items you  
want to set.  
4
5
Press [Done] repeatedly until the  
Basic Features screen is displayed.  
Press [] or [] to specify the number of  
copies.  
12‑5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Functions Menu  
Depending on the model of your machine, some settings may not be available.  
Common Settings  
Setting Item  
Initial Function  
Description  
Specifies the screen that is displayed when you turn on the  
main power, or after the Auto Clear mode initiates. Copy  
– Copy Basic Features screen  
– Send Basic Features screen  
– Scan Basic Features screen  
– System Monitor screen  
– Device status screen  
Auto Clear Setting  
Selects which screen appears after the Auto Clear mode  
initiates.  
Initial Function  
Selected Function  
Audible Tones  
Entry Tone  
Displays the screen selected in Initial Function.  
Displays the screen of the current mode.  
Sets whether to sound audible tones.  
Beeps when pressing keys on the control panel or keys on  
the touch panel display.  
– On (1 to 3 levels)  
– Off  
Error Tone  
Beeps when an error (e.g., paper jam) occurs.  
– On (1 to 3 levels)  
– Off  
Send Done Tone  
Receive Done Tone  
Print Done Tone  
Scan Done Tone  
Beeps when a document is sent.  
– On (1 to 3 levels)  
– Off  
Beeps when a document is received.  
– On (1 to 3 levels)  
– Off  
Beeps when printing is complete.  
– On (1 to 3 levels)  
– Off  
Beeps when scanning is complete.  
– On (1 to 3 levels)  
– Off  
12‑6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Common Settings  
Toner Save Mode  
Selects the toner consumption for printing.  
– High  
– Low  
– Off  
* If the Toner Save mode is set to [High], print quality may be  
affected. If you notice degradation in print quality, set this mode  
to [Off].  
Printer Density  
Recalibrates the density adjustment scale if differences  
between the image in the original and the print occur.  
(1‑9)  
* This function is not effective for print jobs. (See “Printer Settings,”  
on p. 12‑20.)  
Inch Entry  
Enables you to enter values in inches on the numeric entry  
screens.  
– On  
– Off  
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS  
Sets which paper sources can be used for Automatic Paper  
Selection and Automatic Drawer Switching. This setting can  
be made independently for all the different functions of  
the machine, and is especially useful when you want to use  
different paper sources for different purposes.  
– Copy (ON/OFF)  
– Printer (ON/OFF)  
– Receive (ON/OFF)  
– Other (ON/OFF)  
Register Paper Type  
Enables you to specify the paper type loaded in each paper  
source.  
– Paper Drawer 1 (Plain, Recycled, Color, 3‑hole punch,  
Bond, Heavy Paper 1)  
– Paper Drawer 2 (Plain, Recycled, Color, 3‑hole punch,  
Bond, Heavy Paper 1)  
Energy Consumption in Sleep  
Mode  
Sets the amount of energy that the machine consumes when  
it is in the Sleep mode.  
– Low  
– High  
12‑7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Common Settings  
Stack Bypass Standard Settings  
Sets the paper size and type that the stack bypass uses  
beforehand. This setting is useful if you always load the same  
paper size and type into the stack bypass.  
If the Stack Bypass Standard Settings are stored when using  
the Send function, you can also use the stack bypass to  
receive I‑fax or fax documents.  
– On  
– Off  
– When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight  
paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type,  
especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper  
is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the  
image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a  
service repair, or the paper could jam.  
– If you are using the stack bypass as a paper source for Copy  
and Receive (I‑fax or fax), you must select the stack bypass  
when specifying the Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS setting. (See  
p. 2‑25.)  
Paper Feed Method Switch  
Sets whether the printer speed is the priority for your job,  
or whether to print on a specific side of the paper. This is  
useful when you want to make one‑ or two‑sided prints on  
preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already  
printed on it) without changing the orientation of the paper  
of the paper loaded in a paper source.  
– Stack Bypass (Speed, Print Side)  
– Paper Drawer 1 (Speed, Print Side)  
– Paper Drawer 2 (Speed, Print Side)  
Language Switch  
Selects the language on the touch panel display. (See  
Specifications,” on p. 13‑2.)  
Reserved Display (B/W)  
Sets whether to reverse the contrast on the touch panel  
display for better viewing. If you find it hard to read what is  
being shown on the touch panel display, try using this mode.  
– On  
– Off  
Error Display for Dirty Feeder  
Sets whether to display the error message when the feeder  
is dirty.  
– On  
– Off  
12‑8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Common Settings  
Data Compress. Ratio for Remote  
Scans  
Sets the compression ratio for network scanning. A high  
compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used  
for scanning the document, but results in a lower image  
quality. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases  
the amount of memory used for scanning the document, but  
results in a higher image quality.  
– High Ratio  
– Normal  
– Low Ratio  
Gamma Value for Remote Scans  
Sets the gamma value that is used for scanning color  
documents into your computer through the Network Scan  
function. Select a gamma value that is most suited to your  
computer settings so that you can print the document from  
your computer with the most optimal density.  
– Gamma 1.0  
– Gamma 1.4  
– Gamma 1.8  
– Gamma 2.2  
Initialize Common Settings  
Restore all of the Common Settings to their defaults (initial  
settings) except for Language Switch.  
– Yes  
– No  
12‑9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copy Settings  
Setting Item  
Description  
Image Orientation Priority  
Sets whether to activate the image direction priority.  
Copy orientation is rotated at 180 degrees.  
Copy orientation is same as the document.  
Off  
On  
Auto Orientation  
Sets the original size and copy ratio automatically.  
– On  
– Off  
Standard Settings  
Store  
Sets the default setting for copying.  
Sets your own <Standard Settings> as default.  
Restores all <Standard Settings> to the default.  
Initialize  
Initialize Copy Settings  
Restores all <Copy Settings> to the default.  
– Yes  
– No  
12‑10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Timer Setting  
Setting Item  
Description  
Date & Time Settings  
Auto Sleep Time  
Auto Clear Time  
Sets the following:  
– Current date and time  
– Time zone of your machine’s location  
– Daylight saving time mode  
(See “Set Up the Machine,” in the Starter Guide.)  
Sets the auto sleep mode when the machine remains idle for  
a certain period of time (3min‑30min). (See “Setting the Sleep  
Mode,” on p. 1‑22.)  
– On  
– Off  
Sets the auto clear mode when the machine has no  
operation idle for a certain period of time (0min‑9min). The  
machine returns to the Basic Features screen. (See “Setting  
Auto Clear Time,” on p. 1‑23.)  
12‑11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communications Settings  
Setting Item  
Common Settings  
TX Settings  
Description  
Sets the features common to the fax and send functions.  
Sets the transmission features.  
Unit Name  
Registers your name/company name (max. 24 characters,  
including spaces). (See “Set the Machine for Sending  
Documents,” in the Starter Guide.)  
Data Compression Ratio*1  
Sets the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high  
compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used  
for the document, but results in low quality images. On the  
contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of  
memory used for the document, but results in high quality  
images.  
– High Ratio  
– Normal  
– Low Ratio  
Retry Times*1  
Sets the number of retry attempts for sending jobs to an  
e‑mail, I‑fax, or file server address. (0‑5) (See Chapter 4,  
“Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)  
Edit Standard Send Settings Sets the default settings for sending documents. You can  
set the Color mode*1, Document Size, File Format*1, Stamp,  
Resolution, Density, and Original Type. (See Chapter 4,  
“Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)  
TX Terminal ID  
Sets the options for sender information.  
Printing Position  
Selects where the sender information is printed in small type  
at the top of each page.  
– Outside  
– Inside  
Telephone # Mark  
Prefixes your number with the abbreviations FAX or TEL in  
your sender information.  
– FAX  
– TEL  
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.  
12‑12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communications Settings  
Gamma Value for Color  
Send Jobs*1  
Sets the gamma value for color scanned data. If the set value  
corresponds to the gamma value at the recipient’s machine,  
the scan exposure of the output data at the recipient’s  
machine is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to  
the quality of the original. (Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.2, Gamma  
1.0, Gamma 1.4)  
Sharpness  
Sets the contrast of the images you scan. (1‑7)  
Register Favorites Button  
Color TX Scan Settings*1  
Stores destinations with it send settings in favorites buttons.  
Sets the priority for color scanned data. Selecting Speed  
Priority reduces the time spent in sending the document, but  
results in low quality images. Conversely, selecting Image  
Priority increases the time spent in sending the document,  
but results in high quality images.  
– Speed Priority  
– Image Priority  
Default Screen for Send  
Initialize TX Settings  
Sets whether the [Favorites], [One‑touch] tab, or the Send  
Basic Features screen is displayed when the power is turned  
on, (Reset) is pressed, or the Auto Clear mode is activated.  
– Favorites Buttons  
– One‑touch Buttons  
– Initial Function  
Restores the TX Settings to their default settings. However,  
Retry Times, Unit Name, and TX Terminal ID settings are not  
initialized.  
RX Settings  
Sets the reception features.  
2‑Sided Print  
Sets whether the machine prints received documents  
on both sides of the paper. (See Chapter 4, “Sending and  
Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)  
– Off  
– On  
Select Cassette  
Sets how the machine prints documents when there is no  
paper matching the size of the received document. (See  
Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)  
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.  
12‑13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communications Settings  
Switch A  
The image is printed over two sheets of paper that have the  
same combined size as the received document.  
– On  
– Off  
Switch B  
Switch C  
The image is printed with blank space on paper that has the  
same width as the received document.  
– On  
– Off  
The image is reduced and printed on paper that differs in  
width from the received document.  
– On  
– Off  
Switch D  
The image is printed on paper that is larger in size than the  
received document.  
– On  
– Off  
Receive Reduction  
Sets whether the received images print out at a reduced size.  
(See Chapter 4, “Sending and Receiving,” in the Reference  
Guide.)  
On  
Image reduction is turned on.  
RX Reduction  
Selects the reducing type.  
– Auto  
– Fix. Red. (75%, 90%, 95%, or 97%)  
Reduce Direction  
Off  
Selects the reducing direction.  
– Ver. Hor.  
– Vertical Only  
Image reduction is turned off.  
12‑14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communications Settings  
Received Page Footer  
Sets whether to insert the machine’s fax number and the  
sender information on received faxes.  
– Off  
– On  
Continue Printing When  
Toner Is Out  
Sets whether the machine continues printing received  
documents and reports when it is running out of toner. If you  
set the machine not to continue printing, the machine stops  
printing when the toner starts to run out, and automatically  
stores the received documents in memory.  
– Off  
– On  
Fax Settings  
Sets the fax features.  
User Settings  
Unit Telephone #  
Specifies the basic operation settings in the fax mode.  
Registers your fax number (max. 20 characters, including  
spaces). (See “Set the Machine for Sending Documents,” in  
the Starter Guide.)  
Tel Line Type  
Selects the telephone line type. (See “Set the Machine for  
Sending Documents,” in the Starter Guide.)  
– Pulse  
– Tone  
Monitor Volume Control  
Sets the volume for the monitor tone that this machine  
sounds during a fax transmission.  
TX Settings  
ECM TX  
Sets the transmission features.  
Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) transmission  
is activated.  
– On  
– Off  
Pause Time  
Sets the pause time when you insert pause into the dialing  
sequence. (1sec−15sec)  
12‑15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communications Settings  
Auto Redial  
Sets whether to redial automatically when the other line is  
busy or a transmission error occurs. (See Chapter 4, “Sending  
and Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)  
Redial Times  
Sets the number of retries. (1 times−10 times)  
Redial Interval  
Sets period of time before redialing. (2 min.−99 min.)  
Transmission Error Redial Sets whether the machine redials automatically when  
transmission error occurs.  
– On  
– Off  
Check Dial Tone Before  
Sending  
Sets whether to check the telephone line condition.  
– Off  
– On  
Rotate Send  
Sets whether to use the TX Rotation function. TX Rotation  
function automatically corrects the orientation of the  
document by rotating the image when sending. For example,  
if you set a document that has a horizontal orientation  
vertically on the machine, the machine rotates the image and  
sends it horizontally.  
You can use the TX Rotation mode for an LTR document only.  
The TX Rotation mode is not available if you are using the  
Direct Sending or Manual Sending.  
– On  
– Off  
RX Settings  
ECM RX  
Sets the reception features.  
Sets whether the ECM (Error Correction Mode) reception is  
activated.  
– On  
– Off  
12‑16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment/Cleaning  
Setting Item  
Transfer Roller Cleaning  
Fixing Unit Cleaning  
Feeder Cleaning  
Description  
Cleans the transfer roller. (See “Transfer Roller,” on p. 10‑11.)  
Cleans the fixing unit. (See “Fixing Unit,” on p. 10‑3.)  
Cleans the rollers of the feeder. (See “Automatic Feeder  
Cleaning,” on p. 10‑9.)  
Special Mode M  
Sets to improve print quality or fix irregular print density. If  
print quality decreases or an irregularity in the print density  
appears, transcription output may not function adequately.  
Standard  
Low  
Normal transcription output.  
Lower than normal transcription output.  
Selecting [Low] may be effective when printing on paper that  
contains a lot of moisture because it was stored for a long period of  
time after opening, or when printing on recycled paper.  
Moderate  
High  
Slightly higher than normal transcription output.  
Higher than normal transcription output.  
Selecting [High] may be effective when printing on the  
heavyweight paper.  
Special Mode N  
Sets whether to prevent paper curls or jams which may occur  
when printing on paper that has absorbed moisture.  
– Do not use paper that has been exposed to high temperature or  
humidity for an extended period of time. Printing on such paper  
will frequently result in a paper jam.  
– Printing times with Special Mode N activated are longer than  
when the function is not used.  
– If you select [Medium] or [High] when paper is not moistened, the  
print quality may be deteriorated.  
Auto  
Automatically switches to the appropriate curl prevention  
level.  
Manual  
Medium  
High  
Enables manual selection of [Medium] or [High].  
Prevents curling of paper that has absorbed moisture.  
Prevents paper curls more efficiently than when [Medium] is  
selected.  
Off  
Disables Special Mode N.  
12‑17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adjustment/Cleaning  
Special Mode O  
Sets whether to prevent paper jams when printing on the  
back of a printed paper.  
– Do not use paper that has been exposed to high temperature or  
humidity for an extended period of time. Printing on such paper  
will frequently result in a paper jam.  
– When you select [Medium] or [High], the image may become  
faint.  
Medium  
High  
Paper separates easily from the cartridge, preventing paper  
jams.  
Prevents paper jams more effectively than when [Medium] is  
selected.  
Off  
Disables Special Mode O.  
Special Mode P  
Sets whether to prevent paper curls when using paper such  
as lightweight paper or recycled paper, which curls easily  
regardless of humidity.  
If both of the Special Mode N and Special Mode P settings are  
enabled, Special Mode N will prevail.  
Off  
Disables Special Mode P.  
Medium  
High  
Prevents paper from curling.  
Prevents paper curls more effectively than when [Medium] is  
selected.  
Bond Special Fixing Mode  
Special Mode S  
Selects to perform special fixing for bond paper.  
– On  
– Off  
Sets whether to reduce the waiting time for a next job. If  
size of paper required is different for a job that follows an  
extended amount of printing, there may be a waiting time  
before the next job starts.  
* If you set this mode to [Speed Priority 1] or [Speed Priority 2],  
a previously printed image may reappear faintly on the next  
printout.  
Off  
Does not reduce the waiting time.  
Speed Priority 1  
Speed Priority 2  
Reduces the waiting time. Printing resumes quickly.  
Reduces the waiting time to a lesser degree.  
12‑18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjustment/Cleaning  
Rotate Collate Adjustment  
Adjusts the wait time when printing with the Rotate Collate  
mode. Printing with this mode involves two different paper  
sources, and a certain wait time is required to switch them.  
Speed Priority 2  
Image Priority  
Medium wait time.  
Longest wait time.  
Shortest wait time.  
Speed Priority 1  
Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder  
Sets whether to prevent dirt and grime in the feeder from  
appearing on your prints and copies. If the feeder is dirty,  
dots or lines may appear on prints or copies.  
– Off  
– On  
– If either [JPEG] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected for [File Format]  
when the Send function is used, the setting for this mode is not  
applied.  
– While some dots or lines may continue to be printed even if this  
mode is set to [On], copies are significantly clearer than when this  
mode is set to [Off].  
Maintenance Code  
This setting is not functional in this model.  
12‑19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Settings  
Setting Item  
1. DEFAULT PAPERSIZE  
Description  
Sets the default paper size when no paper source is specified.  
(LTR, EXECUTIV, STMT, ISO‑B5, ISO‑C5, COM10, MONARCH,  
DL, A4, A3, B4, B5, A5, 11 x 17, LGL)  
If you are printing from an OS (operating system) that does not  
have a printer driver for the machine, make sure that the paper  
loaded in the paper drawer matches the paper size specified in this  
setting. If the paper size specified in this setting is not available, an  
error message is displayed when the machine tries to print the job  
and the machine stops. In addition, if a paper source has not been  
selected through the application, the machine automatically selects  
the default print settings for the paper size and type.  
2. DEFAULT PAPERTYPE  
Sets the default paper type for print jobs. This machine has  
internally defined optimal print modes for each specified  
paper type.  
(PLAIN PAPER, COLOR, RECYCLED, HEAVY PAPER 1, HEAVY  
PAPER 2, HEAVY PAPER 3, BOND, 3‑HOLE PUNCH PAPER,  
TRANSPARENCY, LABELS, ENVELOPE)  
If you are printing from an OS (operating system) that does not  
have a printer driver for the machine, make sure that the paper  
loaded in the paper drawer matches the paper type specified in this  
setting. If the paper type specified in this setting is not available, an  
error message is displayed when the machine tries to print the job,  
and the machine stops. In addition, if a paper source has not been  
selected through the application, the machine automatically selects  
the default print settings for the paper type and size. (See “Setting  
3. COPIES  
Sets the number of documents printed. (1‑999)  
4. 2‑SIDED PRINTING  
Sets whether to activate two‑sided printing.  
– OFF  
– ON  
5. PRINT QUALITY  
Sets the image quality, density or toner saving mode for  
printing.  
12‑20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer Settings  
1. IMAGE REFINEMENT  
Sets whether to print smoothly the jagged outlines of  
characters and graphics.  
– ON  
– OFF  
The results of image refinement may be different depending on the  
types of characters and graphics you want to print.  
2. DENSITY  
Adjusts the print density. (1‑9)  
3. TONER SAVER  
Sets whether the toner saving mode is enabled.  
– OFF  
– ON  
If [ON] is selected for Toner Saver, very light or finely detailed  
images may not be printed clearly.  
6. PAGE LAYOUT  
1. BINDING  
Sets the printing layout.  
Sets the binding position for two‑sided printing.  
– LONG EDGE  
– SHORT EDGE  
– You cannot create a binding margin with this setting alone. Use  
this setting in combination with the Margin setting to create a  
binding margin.  
– For two‑sided printing, the orientation of the image on the back  
side of the page may be changed by this setting.  
2. MARGIN  
Sets the page margin in inches or millimeters.  
– INCHES (‑01.90INCHES–01.90INCHES)  
– mm (‑50.0 mm–50.0 mm)  
– If this setting moves the image outside the printable area, part of  
the image may be cut off.  
– Pressing [] increases the setting value by 0.01" (0.5 mm) each  
time the key is pressed. Pressing [] decreases the value by 0.01"  
(0.5 mm) each time. Holding down either [] or [] continuously  
speeds up the value alteration.  
12‑21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Settings  
7. AUTO ERROR SKIP  
Sets whether to clear an error and continue printing  
automatically when an error occurs (Error skip).  
– Error skip only temporarily clears an error, so the data may not  
print correctly.  
– This setting is valid even if multiple errors have occurred.  
OFF  
The auto continue is off. You must perform error skips from  
the touch panel display.  
ON  
Error skips are performed automatically.  
8. ERROR TIME OUT  
Sets the length of time before the machine returns an error  
when no data is received from the computer.  
If this function is set so that a job will timeout, the machine may end  
a print job before all the data has been received if it takes a long  
time for the PC to send the data. If this occurs, adjust the length of  
the Error Time Out setting.  
ON  
Sets the error time out period. (5SEC–300SEC)  
The error time out is off.  
OFF  
9. COLLATE  
Sets whether to collate the printouts automatically.  
– OFF  
– COLLATE  
10. INIT. PRINTER SET  
Restores all <PRINTER SETTINGS> to the default.  
– OFF  
– ON  
Do not turn off the machine while the settings are being initialized  
as this may damage the machine’s memory.  
11. PCL SETTINGS*1  
1. PAPER SAVE  
Sets the PCL printer setting.  
Sets whether to save blank pages.  
– OFF  
– ON  
2. ORIENTATION  
3. FONT NUMBER  
Sets the paper orientation.  
– PORTRAIT  
– LANDSCAPE  
Sets the default font typeface for the printer function using  
the corresponding font numbers. (0‑91)  
(See chapter 11, “Appendix,” in the Reference Guide.)  
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.  
12‑22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Settings  
4. POINT SIZE  
Specifies a point size for the default font. This item  
appears when the number in <FONT NUMBER> is that of  
a proportionally spaced scalable font. (4.00 point–999.75  
point)  
5. PITCH  
Specifies the pitch for the default font. This item appears  
when the number in <FONT NUMBER> is that of a fixed pitch  
scalable font. (00.44 cpi–99.99 cpi)  
6. FORM LINES  
7. SYMBOL SET  
Sets the number of lines to be printed on a page. (5 lines‑128  
lines)  
Selects the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host  
computer.  
(PC8, PC850, PC852, PC858, PC8DN, PC8TK, PC1004, PSTEXT,  
ROMAN8, ROMAN9, WIN30, WINBALT, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5,  
DESKTOP, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO60,  
ISO69, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, ISOL9, LEGAL, MCTEXT,  
PC775)  
8. CUSTOM PAPER  
Sets whether to use a custom paper size.  
OFF  
ON  
Disables you to specify a custom paper size.  
Enables you to specify a custom paper size.  
1. UNIT OF MEASURE  
Selects the unit of measurement to specify a custom paper  
size.  
– INCHES  
– MILLIMETERS  
2. X DIMENSION  
3. Y DIMENSION  
9. APPEND CR TO LF  
NO  
Specifies the horizontal size of the custom paper.  
(5.83"‑17.00" (148 mm‑432 mm))  
Specifies the vertical size of the custom paper.  
(3.75"‑11.69" (95 mm‑297 mm))  
Sets whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed  
code (LF) is received.  
The print head moves down to the next line when line feed  
code is received, and the margin does not change (such as  
the beginning of the next line).  
YES  
The print head moves to the beginning of the next line when  
line feed code is received.  
12‑23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Settings  
10. ENLARGE A4  
Sets whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to  
that of Letter size in width.  
– This setting is applicable for the PCL5 printing only. The PCL6  
printing is not supported.  
– This setting is applicable for A4 paper only.  
– This setting is applicable for portrait orientation only.  
OFF  
ON  
All the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top, bottom,  
left, and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper.  
All the area on a page 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top and  
bottom edges and 1/8" (3.30 mm) from the left and right  
edges is available for printing on A4 paper. Only the width  
increases.  
11. HALFTONES  
Specifies the display pattern of subtle gradation (medium  
gradation) for black‑and‑white data for each text part,  
graphics part and image part.  
1. TEXT  
Enables this function to text parts.  
RESOLUTION  
Prints precisely so that the lines of text data appear clearly.  
This setting is appropriate for printing data that contains text  
or thin lines.  
TONE  
Prints with a stable texture and distinct gradation, by  
enhancing the contrast of tone. This setting is appropriate for  
printing image data such as photographic images.  
GRADATION  
2. GRAPHICS  
Prints with a smooth gradation and fine outline quality  
combined. This setting is appropriate for printing diagrams  
or graphs in which gradation is used.  
Enables this function to graphics parts such as diagrams and  
graphs.  
– TONE  
– GRADATION  
– RESOLUTION  
3. IMAGE  
Enables this function to image parts such as picture images.  
– TONE  
– GRADATION  
– RESOLUTION  
12‑24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Settings  
12. RESET PRINTER  
Clears all print jobs in progress and resets the printer  
function.  
– OFF  
– ON  
– If the machine is being used on a network, please note that  
resetting the printer may affect data being received from other  
users.  
– If you reset the printer, data may be deleted for print jobs that  
have already been received, or received while the printer is being  
reset. However, in some cases, the data is not deleted from the  
machine’s memory, and the print job may not print correctly.  
Canon recommends that you reset the printer to delete the data  
and print the job again.  
12‑25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Address Book Settings  
Setting Item  
Description  
Register Address  
Registers the destinations in the Address Book. Up to 300  
destinations can be registered. (See “Storing/Editing Address  
Book,” on p. 4‑58.)  
One‑touch Buttons  
Registers the destinations on one‑touch buttons. Up to 200  
destinations can be registered. (See “Storing/Editing One‑  
Touch Buttons,” on p. 4‑71.)  
12‑26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Report Settings  
Setting Item  
Description  
Settings  
Sets the report functions. (See Chapter 11, “Appendix,” in the  
Reference Guide.)  
TX Report  
For Error Only  
Sets whether the transmission report prints out.  
Prints a report only when a transmission error occurs.  
Report With TX Image  
Report With TX Image  
Sets whether to print the first page of the document under  
the report. (When you are sending a PC‑Fax or a color  
document, the first page of the document is not printed even  
if you set [Report With TX Image] to [On].)  
– Off  
– On  
On  
Off  
Prints a report every time you send a document.  
Sets whether to print the first page of the document under  
the report. (When you are sending a PC‑Fax or a color  
document, the first page of the document is not printed even  
if you set [Report With TX Image] to [On].)  
– Off  
– On  
No report is printed.  
Activity Report  
Sets whether to automatically print the transaction report  
and selects its type.  
Auto Print  
Sets whether an activity report is printed automatically every  
40 transactions.  
– On  
– Off  
Send/Receive Separate  
Sets whether an activity report is printed separately for  
sending and receiving or not.  
– Off  
– On  
12‑27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Report Settings  
RX Report  
Off  
Sets whether the reception report prints out.  
No report is printed.  
For Error Only  
On  
Prints a report only when a reception error occurs.  
Prints a report every time you receive a document.  
Prints lists.  
Print List  
Address Book List  
Prints the destinations registered in the Address Book (one‑  
touch buttons and Address Book).  
One‑touch Buttons  
Prints the destinations registered in one‑touch buttons.  
Prints the destinations registered in the Address Book.  
Address Book  
User’s Data List  
Prints the setting list registered in the menu. (See “Printing  
USER’S DATA LIST,” on p. 12‑2.)  
12‑28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Setting Item  
Description  
System Manager Settings  
Sets the system manager information to protect the contents  
of System Settings. Once the system manager ID and system  
password is set, they must be entered every time you access  
the System Settings menu.  
System Manager  
Sets the system manager name (max. 32 characters,  
including spaces).  
System Manager ID  
System Password  
Device Info Settings  
Device Name  
Sets the system manager ID (seven digits).  
Sets the system manager password (seven digits).  
Sets device information.  
Registers the machine name (max. 32 characters, including  
spaces).  
Location  
Registers the machine location (max. 32 characters, including  
spaces).  
Department ID Management  
Sets if the department ID management is used.  
Does not use the department ID management.  
Uses the department ID management.  
Off  
On  
Register ID/Password  
Register  
Sets up or modifies Department ID information.  
Registers new Department IDs and passwords.  
Turn Limits On/Off and  
Set Page Limits  
Sets page limits for scan, prints, and copies from 0 to 999,999  
pages.  
Edit  
Changes registered passwords and page limits.  
Turn Limits On/Off and  
Set Page Limits  
Changes page limits for scan, prints, and copies from 0 to  
999,999 pages.  
Erase  
Erases registered Department IDs and passwords.  
Displays, clears, and prints counter information.  
Clears the counter information for selected departments.  
Clears the counter information for all departments.  
Prints a list of counter information.  
Page Totals  
Clear  
Clear All Totals  
Print List  
12‑29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Settings  
Allow ID Unknown Printer Jobs Sets if print jobs from computers with unknown IDs are  
accepted or rejected.  
– On  
– Off  
Allow ID Unknown Remote  
Scan Jobs  
Sets if network scan jobs from computers with unknown IDs  
are accepted or rejected.  
– Off  
– On  
User ID Management*1  
Network Settings*1  
Sets if the user ID management is used.  
– Off  
– On  
Sets the network setting. (See Chapter 6, “Network  
(imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the Reference  
Guide or “Set the Machine for Network Usage (imageCLASS  
MF7480/MF7470 Only),” in the Starter Guide.)  
TCP/IP Settings  
IPv4 Settings  
IP Address Settings  
IP Address  
Sets TCP/IP network.  
Sets TCP/IPv4 network.  
Sets IPv4 Address settings.  
Registers a fixed IPv4 address to the machine.  
Registers a fixed subnet mask to the machine.  
Registers a fixed gateway address to the machine.  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway Address  
DHCP  
Sets whether to automatically obtain an IPv4 address for the  
machine using a DHCP server.  
RARP  
Sets whether to automatically obtain an IPv4 address for the  
machine using a RARP server.  
BOOTP  
Sets whether to automatically obtain an IPv4 address for the  
machine using a BOOTP server.  
PING Command  
Checks the TCP/IPv4 network connection.  
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.  
12‑30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
IP Address Range  
Sets whether to use the IP address filter function.  
Settings  
Off  
Disables the IP address filter.  
Enables the IP address filter.  
On  
Permit/Reject  
Register  
Selects whether to permit or reject access from a specified  
IPv4 address or IPv4 address range.  
Specifies the IPv4 address or IPv4 address range to be  
restricted.  
Single Address Specifies a single IPv4 address to be restricted.  
Multiple  
Specifies a range of IPv4 addresses to be restricted.  
Addresses  
Edit  
Edits the IP address or IPv4 address range to be restricted.  
Erases the IP address or IPv4 address range to be restricted.  
Sets the DNS server settings.  
Erase  
DNS Server  
DNS Server Address  
Settings  
Primary DNS  
Registers the DNS server address.  
Registers the primary server address.  
Server  
Secondary DNS  
Server  
Registers the secondary server address.  
DNS Host Name/  
Domain Name  
Settings  
Registers the host name and domain name of the DNS server.  
Host Name  
Registers the host name of the DNS server.  
Registers the domain name of the DNS server.  
Domain Name  
DNS Dynamic Update Sets whether to use the DNS server dynamic update function.  
– Off  
– On  
Settings  
12‑31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
IPv6 Settings  
Use IPv6  
Sets IPv6 Address settings.  
Sets the use of IPv6 address.  
– Off  
– On  
Stateless Address  
Settings  
Sets the machine to obtain the IPv6 address automatically  
using the machine’s MAC address and the prefix (information  
indicating the network belonged to) included in the RA  
(Router Advertisement) notified by the router when the  
machine is started.  
– Off  
– On  
Manual Address Settings Sets whether to set a fixed IPv6 address to the machine.  
Off  
On  
A fixed IPv6 address is not set.  
Sets a fixed IPv6 address to the machine.  
Registers a fixed IPv6 address to the machine.  
Sets the prefix length of the IPv6 address. (0‑128)  
Sets the default router address.  
Manual Address  
Prefix Length  
Default Router  
Addr.  
Use DHCPv6  
Sets whether to use DHCPv6.  
– Off  
– On  
PING Command  
IPv6 Address  
Checks the TCP/IPv6 network connection.  
Checks the network connection by specifying the IPv6  
address.  
Host Name  
Checks the network connection by specifying the host name.  
12‑32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
IP Address Range  
Sets whether to use the IP address filter function.  
Settings  
Off  
Disables the IP address filter.  
Enables the IP address filter.  
On  
Permit/Reject  
Reg.  
Selects whether to permit or reject access from a specified  
IPv6 address or IPv6 address range.  
Specifies the IPv6 address or IPv6 address range to be  
restricted.  
Single Address Specifies a single IPv6 address to be restricted.  
Multiple  
Specifies a range of IPv6 addresses to be restricted.  
Addresses  
Prefix Address Specifies a prefix address on IPv6 addresses to be restricted.  
Edit  
Edits the IPv6 address or IPv6 address range to be restricted.  
Erases the IPv6 address or IPv6 address range to be restricted.  
Sets the DNS server settings.  
Erase  
DNS Server  
DNS Server Address  
Settings  
Primary DNS  
Registers the DNS server address.  
Registers the primary server address.  
Server  
Secondary DNS  
Server  
Registers the secondary server address.  
DNS Host Name/  
Domain Name  
Settings  
Registers the host name and domain name of the DNS server.  
Use Same Host  
Name/Domain  
Name as IPv4  
Sets whether to use the same host name and domain name  
as IPv4.  
– Off  
– On  
Host Name  
Registers the host name of the DNS server.  
Registers the domain name of the DNS server.  
Domain Name  
DNS Dynamic Update Sets whether to use the DNS server dynamic update function.  
– Off  
– On  
Settings  
12‑33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
WINS Configuration  
Sets the WINS settings to resolve a name with WINS.  
Sets the machine not to resolve a name with WINS.  
Sets the machine to resolve a name with WINS.  
Registers the IP address of a WINS server.  
Off  
On  
WINS Server  
LPD Settings  
Sets whether to use LPD as the print application.  
– On  
– Off  
RAW Settings  
On  
Sets whether to use RAW as the print application.  
Enables the use of RAW.  
Use Bidirectional  
Sets whether to use bidirectional communication.  
– On  
– Off  
Off  
Disables the use of RAW.  
Use PASV Mode for FTP  
Sets whether to use the PASV mode for FTP.  
– Off  
– On  
FTP Extension  
Use HTTP  
Sets whether to use the FTP extension.  
– Off  
– On  
Sets whether to activate HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol)  
for the Remote UI.  
– On  
– Off  
Port Number Settings  
LPD  
Sets the port number settings.  
0‑65535 (default: 515)  
0‑65535 (default: 9100)  
0‑65535 (default: 80)  
0‑65535 (default: 25)  
0‑65535 (default: 110)  
0‑65535 (default: 21)  
0‑65535 (default: 25)  
0‑65535 (default: 161)  
RAW  
HTTP  
SMTP Receive  
POP3 Receive  
FTP Sending  
SMTP Sending  
SNMP  
12‑34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Receiving MAC Address  
Settings  
Sets whether to activate a MAC address filter.  
Disables MAC address filter.  
Off  
On  
Specifies a MAC address filter to access. MAC address must  
be entered for each setting.  
Register  
Registers MAC addresses. Up to five MAC addresses can be  
registered.  
Edit  
Erase  
Edits MAC addresses.  
Erases MAC addresses.  
Proxy Settings  
Use Proxy  
Off  
Sets the proxy settings.  
Sets the use of a proxy server.  
Proxy server is not used.  
On  
Proxy server is used.  
Server Address  
Sets a proxy server IP address or FQDN.  
Sets the port number of a proxy server.  
Sets whether to use a proxy in the same domain.  
Port Number  
Use Proxy within  
the Same Domain  
Authentication  
Settings  
Sets proxy authentication.  
Off  
Disables proxy authentication.  
On  
Enables proxy authentication.  
User  
Sets the user name to use for proxy authentication.  
Sets the password to use for proxy authentication.  
Password  
12‑35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
SMB Settings  
Sets the SMB settings to use the machine on a NetBIOS  
network.  
Use SMB Client  
Off  
Sets whether to use SMB Client.  
SMB client is not used.  
On  
SMB client is used.  
Server  
Enters the NetBIOS name of the machine.  
Enters the name of the workgroup the machine belongs to.  
Enters a comment about the printer.  
Workgroup  
Comment  
LM Announce  
Sets if the machine notifies the LAN Manager of its existence.  
– Off  
– On  
SNMP Settings  
Use SNMP  
On  
Sets detailed information about SNMP.  
Sets whether to activate SNMP.  
Activates SNMP.  
Community Name  
Sets SNMP community name (default: public).  
Writable SNMP  
Enables computers on the network to access the machine  
and modify its settings.  
– On  
– Off  
Get Printer  
Management  
Information from  
Host  
Sets whether to get printer management information from  
host.  
Off  
Deactivates SNMP.  
12‑36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Enable Dedicated Port  
Sets or browses detailed information on the machine with a  
Canon printer driver or utility.  
– On  
– Off  
Ethernet Driver Settings  
Specifies the type of network connection.  
Auto Detect  
On  
Selects the detection method of Ethernet driver.  
Sets the machine to determine the communication mode  
(Half duplex/Full duplex) and Ethernet type (10Base‑  
T/100Base‑TX) automatically.  
Off  
Sets the communication mode and Ethernet type manually.  
Communication  
Mode  
Selects the communication mode.  
– Half Duplex  
– Full Duplex  
Ethernet Type  
Selects the Ethernet type.  
– 10 Base‑T  
– 100 Base‑TX  
E‑mail/I‑Fax*1  
SMTP Receive  
Sets detailed settings for e‑mail/I‑fax.  
Sets whether to receive e‑mail/l‑faxes using the machine’s  
own SMTP receiving function.  
– Off  
– On  
POP  
Sets whether to receive e‑mail/l‑faxes using a POP server.  
– Off  
– On  
Authentication/Encryption  
Specifies authenticating method before sending e‑mail.  
POP Authentication  
before Send  
Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires POP before  
SMTP (method for authenticating users who have logged in  
the POP server before sending e‑mail).  
– Off  
– On  
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.  
12‑37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
SMTP Authentication  
(SMTP AUTH)  
Sets whether to use the SMTP server requires SMTP  
Authentication (method for authenticating users who have  
logged in the POP server before sending e‑mail).  
Off  
On  
Disables SMTP Authentication.  
Enables SMTP Authentication.  
– User  
– Password  
SMTP Server  
Registers the SMTP server name.  
E‑mail Address  
Enters the e‑mail address your machine will use (max. 64  
characters).  
POP Server  
Enters the POP server IP address or name (max. 48  
characters).  
POP Address  
POP Password  
POP Interval  
Enters the login name for access to the POP server (max. 32  
characters).  
Enters the password for access to the POP server (max. 32  
characters).  
Sets the interval you want the POP server to check for  
incoming e‑mail. If the interval is set to 0, the POP server is  
not checked automatically. (1‑99)  
Startup Time Settings  
Sets the time period required to delay the startup of network  
communications for the machine (0‑300sec).  
Communications Settings  
E‑mail/I‑Fax Settings*1  
Maximum TX Data Size  
Sets the fax and e‑mail/I‑fax communication.  
Sets the e‑mail/I‑fax communications.  
Sets the maximum data size for outgoing e‑mail messages  
and I‑fax documents. If the e‑mail message send job exceeds  
this data size limit, it is split up into several e‑mail messages  
before being sent. However, if an I‑fax transmission exceeds  
the data size limit, it is handled as an error, and it is not sent.  
(0MB‑99MB)  
Divided TX over Max.Data  
Size  
Sets whether to divide a document into separate files when it  
is sent if its size exceeds the data size you specify.  
– Off  
– On  
Default Subject  
The subject that you enter here is used as the default subject  
whenever you do not enter a subject when sending a job.  
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.  
12‑38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Settings  
Fax Settings  
Sets the facsimile communication.  
Send Start Speed  
Sets the transmission start speed for faxes. (33600bps,  
14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps)  
Receive Start Speed  
Sets the reception start speed for faxes. (33600bps,  
14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps)  
Memory Lock Settings  
Sets whether to receive and store all documents in memory  
and not to print automatically. (See Chapter 4, “Sending and  
Receiving,” in the Reference Guide.)  
– Off  
– On  
Memory Lock Password  
Report Print  
Registers the password that protects the authority for  
accessing Memory Lock settings.  
Sets whether to print a report on memory lock reception.  
– Off  
– On  
Memory Lock Time Settings Sets whether to set a period for memory lock reception.  
Off  
On  
Disables setting a period of memory lock reception.  
Enables setting a period of memory lock reception.  
– Memory Lock Start Time  
– Memory Lock End Time  
Forwarding Settings  
Sets the machine to forward received I‑fax documents to  
other machines or the file servers. If a received document  
matches the forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the  
specified destination.  
Validate/Invalidate  
Register  
Turns on or off the forwarding mode.  
Registers forwarding conditions.  
Condition Name  
Sets a name for the forwarding condition. You can enter up  
to 50 characters for the condition name.  
Forwarding Conditions  
Sets the forwarding condition.  
12‑39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Fax  
Sets the forwarding condition for received fax documents.  
– [disregarded]: Disregards the Fax Number information as a  
forwarding condition.  
– [does not exist]: Forwards the document if the Fax  
Number information does not exist.  
– [equals]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number  
information matches all of the characters entered.  
– [differs from]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number  
information differs from the characters entered.  
– [begins with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number  
information begins with the characters entered.  
– [ends with]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number  
information ends with the characters entered.  
– [contains]: Forwards the document if the Fax Number  
information contains the characters entered.  
– [does not contain]: Forwards the document if the Fax  
Number information does not contain the characters  
entered.  
I‑Fax*1  
Sets the forwarding condition for received I‑fax documents.  
– [disregarded]: Disregards the Destination, From, or Subject  
information as forwarding conditions.  
– [equals]: Forwards the document if the From or Subject  
information matches all of the characters entered.  
– [differs from]: Forwards the document if the Destination,  
From, or Subject information differs from the characters  
entered.  
– [begins with]: Forwards the document if the Destination,  
From, or Subject information begins with the characters  
entered.  
– [ends with]: Forwards the document if the Destination,  
From, or Subject information ends with the characters  
entered.  
– [contains]: Forwards the document if the Destination,  
From, or Subject information contains the characters  
entered.  
– [does not contain]: Forwards the document if the  
Destination, From, or Subject information does not  
contain the characters entered.  
Forwarding Destination  
File Format*1  
Sets the destination address to forward the document.  
Sets the file format of the document you want to forward.  
– TIFF  
– PDF  
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.  
12‑40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Forward w/o Cond.  
Sets whether to store the forwarding destinations of a  
received document if the forwarding settings of the received  
document are not registered, or if the received document  
does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you  
have specified.  
Forwarding Destination  
File Format*1  
Sets the destination address to forward the document.  
Sets the file format of the document you want to forward.  
– TIFF  
– PDF  
Detail/Edit  
You can check or change forwarding settings that have been  
stored.  
Erase  
Erases the selected forwarding condition.  
Prints the forwarding conditions list.  
Print List  
Remote UI On/Off*2  
Sets whether to activate the Remote UI function to operate  
the machine and change the settings from a network  
computer using a web browser.  
– On  
– Of  
Restrict the Send Function  
Address Book Password  
Sets restrictions on the Send function.  
Sets a password to restrict editing the Address Book. (7 digits  
maximum)  
– Off  
– On  
Restrict New Addresses  
Sets whether to restrict registering or changing destinations  
in the Address Book. Sets whether to restrict making calls to  
the destinations not registered in Address Book.  
– Off  
– On  
Allow Fax Driver TX  
Sets whether to restrict sending faxes from a computer using  
the fax driver.  
– On  
– Off  
Confirm Entered Fax Numbers  
Sets whether to confirm the entered fax numbers each time  
you send a fax.  
– Off  
– On  
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480.  
*2 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.  
12‑41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Restrict Recall  
Sets whether to disable the redial function of the [Recall] key.  
– Off  
– On  
Restrict Sequential Broadcast  
Confirmation Broadcast  
Sets whether to disable the broadcasting function.  
Sets whether to confirm to enable the broadcasting function  
each time you send.  
Prohibit Broadcast  
Off  
Disables the broadcasting function.  
The restrict broadcast setting is not set.  
Job Log Display  
Sets whether to display job logs.  
– On  
– Off  
Use USB Device  
Sets whether to restrict jobs through the USB interface.  
– On  
– Off  
Display Dept. ID/User Name  
Sets whether to display the Department ID or user name  
which is currently being used to log on to the machine in the  
Job/Print Status Display Area.  
– On  
– Off  
Failed Forwarding Document Set.  
Print Image  
Sets the machine to print and/or store received documents  
when document forwarding fails.  
Sets whether to print out the image if forwarding fails.  
– On  
– Off  
Store Image to Memory  
Sets whether to store the image in memory if forwarding  
fails.  
– Off  
– On  
Auto Online/Offline*1  
Auto Online  
Switches the machine online and offline to use the network  
scan function.  
Sets whether to switch the machine online.  
– Off  
– On  
Auto Offline  
Sets whether to switch the machine offline.  
– Off  
– On  
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.  
12‑42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Update Firmware  
This function is used only when the printer firmware needs to  
be updated.  
PDL Selection (PnP)  
Detects and installs drivers that support functions specified  
on the machine into your computer.  
– UFRII LT  
– PCL5e*1  
– PCL6*1  
– FAX  
*1 Indicates the item that appear only for the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.  
12‑43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12‑44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
General  
Type  
Desktop  
Power Source  
Maximum Power  
Consumption  
Warm-up Time  
120 V AC, 60 Hz, 4.6 A  
Approximately 1.425 kW  
26 seconds maximum after powering on  
Activation time may vary, depending on the conditions  
under which the machine is being used. (In all cases, at a  
room temperature of 68°F (20°C).)  
Weight  
Approximately 123 lb (56 kg)  
Dimensions (W x D x H)  
Installation Space  
(W x D)  
24 1/2" x 26 5/8" x 29 3/4" (622 mm × 676 mm × 757 mm)  
36 1/4" x 26 5/8" (920 mm × 676 mm)  
(when the stack bypass is extended)  
Stationary  
Platen Type  
Photoconductive  
Material  
OPC (Organic Photo Conductor)  
Copying System  
Density Control  
Developing System  
Indirect Electrostatic Copying  
Automatic or manual (9 levels)  
Single component dry toner projection development  
system  
Fixing System  
On‑demand fusing  
Capacity Per Tray  
Maximum Original Size  
Output Orientation  
250 sheets  
11 3/4" x 17" (297 mm x 432 mm)  
Face Down  
13‑2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General  
Paper Feeding System  
Paper Drawers:  
250 sheets x 2 drawers (22 lb bond (80 g/m ))  
2
Stack Bypass:  
80 sheets (LTR/LTRR/STMT/STMTR/EXEC,  
2
22 lb bond (80 g/m ))  
50 sheets (LGL/11" x 17", 22 lb bond (80 g/m ))  
2
50 sheets (Transparencies/Heavyweight paper, 24 lb to  
2
32 lb bond (91 to 128 g/m ))  
10 envelopes  
1 sheet (Labels)  
Display Languages  
Acceptable Originals  
ENGLISH/FRANCAIS/ESPAÑOL/PORTUGUÊS  
» p. 2‑2.  
Acceptable Paper Stock » p. 2‑11.  
Printable Area  
Scanning Area  
» p. 2‑14.  
» p. 2‑4  
Feeder  
Type  
Automatic Document Feeder  
Originals  
Original Paper Weight  
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT  
2
2
14 lb to 28 lb bond (52 g/m to 105 g/m ) (One‑page  
2
2
scanning for 10 lb to 14 lb bond (37 g/m to 52 g/m ) and  
2
2
28 lb to 32 lb bond (105 g/m to 128 g/m ))  
2
Original Tray Capacity  
LTR, LTRR: 50 sheets (22 lb bond (80 g/m ))  
2
LGL, 11" x 17": 25 sheets (22 lb bond (80 g/m ))  
Original Scanning Speed 20 sheets/minute (LTR)  
Power Source  
From main unit  
Power Consumption  
Dimensions (W x D x H)  
Weight  
Approximately 26 W max.  
22 1/4" x 19 1/4" x 4 7/8" (565 mm x 489.4 mm x 122 mm)  
Approximately 15.4 lb (7.0 kg)  
13‑3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Duplex Unit  
Paper Sizes  
11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT  
2
2
Paper Weight  
Power Source  
Power Consumption  
17 lb to 24 lb bond (64 g/m to 90 g/m )  
From main unit  
Approximately 21 W max.  
Dimensions (W × D × H) 17 1/4" × 17 5/8" × 14 7/8" (437.2 mm × 448 mm ×  
378.3 mm)  
Weight  
Approximately 5 lb (2.5 kg)  
Copier  
Copying System  
Scanning Resolution  
Printing Resolution  
Magnification  
Indirect electrostatic copying  
600 dpi x 600 dpi  
1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi  
Direct 1:1 ( 0.5%)  
Reduction 1:0.78 (LGL LTRR)  
1:0.73 (11" x 17" LGL)  
1:0.64 (11" x 17" LTRR)  
1:0.50 (11" x 17" STMTR)  
Enlargement 1:1.21 (LGL 11" x 17")  
1:1.29 (LTRR 11" x 17")  
1:2.00 (STMTR 11" x 17")  
First Copy Time  
Copy Speed  
6.9 seconds (LTR, direct, paper drawer 1)  
Sheets per minute  
Direct  
imageCLASS imageCLASS imageCLASS  
MF7480  
15  
MF7470  
15  
MF7460  
15  
11" x 17" 10  
LGL 10  
11  
11  
11  
LTR 20  
25  
18  
18  
LTRR 11  
STMT 16  
11  
11  
11  
10  
10  
10  
Multiple Copies  
1 to 99 sheets  
13‑4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printer  
Paper Delivery  
2
100 sheets (17 to 24 lb bond (64 to 90 g/m ))  
Print Speed  
See “Copy Speed,on p. 13‑4.  
1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi  
256  
Printing Resolution  
Number of Tones  
Cartridge  
» p. 1‑20.  
Controller Specifications  
CPU  
ARM9 196MHz  
Memory Capacity  
RAM:  
Standard 256MB  
ROM:  
Standard 36MB (16+4MB+16MB)  
One USB connector (V2.0)  
Host interface  
Software Specifications  
Command Language  
Resident Fonts  
1
1
PCL5e* , PCL6* , and UFRII LT  
1
PCL* :  
80 Scalable fonts, 2 OCR fonts, and 10 Bitmap fonts  
1
1
Printable Area  
PCL5e* , PCL6* :  
Reduced to 1/8" (4.23 mm) from the top, bottom, left,  
and right edges of the paper.  
UFRII LT:  
Reduced to 1/4" (5 mm) (for Envelope: 3/8" (10 mm))  
from the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the paper.  
1
*
Only for users of the imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470.  
13‑5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Facsimile  
Telephone Line Used/  
Public Switched Telephone Network, 1 line  
Number of Lines  
Transmission Type  
Compression Method  
Transmission Speed  
Transmission Times  
Super G3, G3  
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG  
Super G3: 33.6 kbps, G3: 14.4 kbps  
ECM‑MMR: Approximately 3.2 seconds  
G3MR method: Approximately 13 seconds  
G3MH method: Approximately 13 seconds  
JBIG: Approximately 2.6 seconds  
Image Memory  
Scan Line Density (Scan, Standard: 8 pels* /mm × 3.85 line/mm  
Approximately 1,000 pages  
1
1
Transmission)  
Fine: 8 pels* /mm × 7.7 line/mm  
1
Super Fine: 8 pels* /mm × 15.4 line/mm  
1
Ultra Fine: 16 pels* /mm × 15.4 line/mm  
Auto Dial Function  
Address Book (300 destinations)  
One‑touch buttons (200 destinations)  
Favorites buttons (18 destinations)  
Group addresses (499 destinations)  
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, or STMTR  
11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, or STMTR  
Sending Original Sizes  
Receiving Paper Sizes  
1
*
Pels stands for picture elements (pixels).  
13‑6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Send (imageCLASS MF7480 Only)  
Send to file server  
Communication Protocol  
Data Format  
FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP)  
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF  
(Compact) (Color)  
Resolution  
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi,  
200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,  
400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi  
System Environment  
Windows 98/Me, Windows XP Professional/  
Home Edition, Windows 2000 Server/  
Professional (SP1 or later), Windows Server  
2003, Windows Vista, Solaris Version 2.6 or  
later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2  
100BASE‑TX, 10BASE‑T  
Interface  
Color Mode  
Original Type  
Others  
Color, B&W (black and white)  
Text, Text/Photo, Photo  
Browse Windows (SMB) File Server  
1
E-mail and I-fax*  
Communication Protocol  
Resolution  
SMTP, POP3, I‑Fax (Simple mode)  
For Sending E‑mail:  
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi,  
200 x 200 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,  
400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi  
For Sending I‑Fax:  
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi  
E‑mail: TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color),  
PDF (Compact) (Color)  
Data Format  
Original Size  
I‑Fax: TIFF (MH)  
E‑mail: 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT,  
STMTR  
I‑Fax: LGL* , LTR, LTRR, STMT* , STMTR*  
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 (SP2),  
2
2
2
Server Software  
Sendmail 8.11.2, Lotus Domino R4.5/R5  
1
*
*
Only the B&W mode is available for sending and receiving I‑fax documents.  
Sent as LTR  
2
13‑7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ethernet Interface Adaptor (imageCLASS MF7480/MF7470 Only)  
Hardware Specifications  
Network Interface  
Software Specifications  
Protocol Supported  
10Base‑T/100Base‑TX (RJ‑45)  
TCP/IP  
Frame type: Ethernet II  
Print applications: LPD/Raw  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
13‑8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Automatic paper selection 2‑25, 3‑4  
Auto zoom 3‑14, 3‑17  
Symbols & Numerics  
1 to 2‑Sided 3‑25, 3‑27  
2 to 1‑Sided 3‑26, 3‑29  
2 to 2‑Sided 3‑25, 3‑28  
3‑hole punch paper 2‑11  
Available paper sizes 5‑11  
B
Basic copying method 3‑2  
Basic printing method 6‑2  
A
Accessing the setting menu 12‑3  
Basic sending method  
E‑mail 4‑4  
File server 4‑11  
I‑fax 4‑8  
Activity report  
Printing 4‑96, 5‑9  
Additional Functions key 1‑6  
Additional Functions menu  
Before using the machine 1‑1  
Accessing 12‑3  
Bond paper 2‑11  
Address Book Settings 12‑26  
Adjustment/Cleaning 12‑17  
Common Settings 12‑6  
Communications Settings 12‑12  
Copy Settings 12‑10  
Book to 2‑Sided 3‑26, 3‑31  
Brightness  
Adjusting 1‑16  
Printer Settings 12‑20  
Report Settings 12‑27  
System Settings 12‑29  
Timer Settings 12‑11  
C
Canceling  
Copy jobs 3‑35  
Copy settings 3‑34  
Print jobs 6‑5  
RX jobs 5‑3  
Scan jobs 7‑7  
TX jobs 4‑90  
Address Book  
Erasing addresses 4‑83  
Registering e‑mail addresses 4‑61  
Registering fax numbers 4‑58  
Registering file server addresses 4‑65  
Registering group addresses 4‑67  
Registering I‑fax addresses 4‑63  
Storing/editing 4‑58  
Canceling copy jobs  
Using the system monitor screen 3‑36  
Using the touch panel display 3‑35  
Using 4‑43  
Canceling Print jobs  
Address Book Settings 12‑26  
Adjustment/Cleaning 12‑17  
Auto clear time 1‑23  
Using the system monitor screen 6‑5  
Canceling scan jobs  
Using the system monitor screen 7‑7  
Automatic drawer switching 2‑25  
13‑9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cartridge  
About the cartridge 1‑4  
Color mode  
Setting for sending 4‑18  
Maintaining 1‑21  
Recycling 10‑20  
Replacing 10‑14  
Color paper 2‑11  
Common Settings 12‑6  
Communications Settings 12‑12  
Components 1‑2  
Changing  
Copy settings 3‑34  
Checking  
Confirming  
Arrival of I‑fax jobs 5‑10  
Copy job 3‑37  
Print jobs 6‑7  
Copy settings 3‑33  
Consumables  
Cartridge 10‑28  
Paper stock 10‑27  
Stamp cartridge 10‑28  
RX jobs 5‑5  
Status of fax jobs 4‑94  
Status of received fax jobs 5‑5  
Status of receive jobs 5‑7  
Status of send jobs 4‑97  
TX jobs 4‑94  
Control panel  
About the control panel 1‑2, 1‑5  
Control panel power switch 1‑9  
Control panel power switch 1‑5  
Copy features ii  
Copying 3‑1  
Clean Earth Campaign 10‑20  
Cleaning machine  
Exterior 10‑2  
Fixing unit 10‑3  
Scanning area 10‑6  
Clearing jams  
Copy job  
Canceling 3‑35  
Checking 3‑37  
Deleting 3‑37  
Duplex unit 11‑11  
Feeder 11‑5  
Fixing unit 11‑8  
Paper drawer 1 11‑13  
Paper drawer 2 11‑15  
Stack bypass 11‑7  
COPY key 1‑5  
Copy ratio 3‑14  
Auto zoom 3‑17  
Preset zoom 3‑15  
Zoom by percentage 3‑16  
Clear key 1‑5  
COPY SETTINGS 12‑10  
Collate copy 3‑21  
Customer support  
Group mode 3‑23  
Page order 3‑22  
Same page 3‑23  
Collate mode 3‑21  
D
Collating  
Deleting  
Copy job 3‑37  
Density  
Collate mode 3‑21  
Finisher mode 3‑21  
Group mode 3‑21  
Rotate mode 3‑22  
Automatic adjustment 4‑25  
Manual adjustment 4‑24  
Setting for sending 4‑24  
13‑10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Department ID Management  
Exposure 3‑12  
After using the machine 1‑19  
Before using the machine 1‑17  
Automatic adjustment 3‑12  
Manual adjustment 3‑13  
Destination  
Checking/changing 4‑49  
Erasing 4‑51  
Specifying 4‑32  
F
Favorites buttons  
Erasing 4‑88  
Device status  
Checking 1‑24  
Direct sending 4‑54  
Registering 4‑86  
Storing/editing 4‑86  
Using 4‑48  
Fax numbers  
Display Contrast dial 1‑6  
Registering in Address Book 4‑58  
Registering in one‑touch buttons 4‑71  
Feeder 2‑9  
Document  
Printing 6‑2  
Receiving 5‑2  
Sending 4‑2  
About the feeder 1‑2, 1‑3  
Automatic feeder cleaning 10‑9  
Clearing paper jams 11‑5  
Manual feeder cleaning 10‑7  
Specifications 13‑3  
Document size  
Setting for sending 4‑20  
Duplex unit 1‑4, 11‑11  
Feeder cover 1‑3  
E
File format  
Setting for sending 4‑14  
File server addresses  
E‑mail addresses  
Registering in Address Book 4‑61  
Registering in one‑touch buttons 4‑75  
Registering in Address Book 4‑65  
Registering in one‑touch buttons 4‑79  
Enlargement copy ratios 3‑15  
Entering characters  
Finisher mode 3‑21  
Fixing unit 1‑4, 11‑8  
Front cover 1‑4  
Alphanumeric characters 1‑13  
Symbols 1‑14  
Values in inches 1‑15  
Envelope 2‑12  
G
COM 10 2‑12  
Group addresses  
ISO‑B5 2‑12  
ISO‑C5 2‑12  
Monarch 2‑12  
Registering in Address Book 4‑67  
Registering in one‑touch buttons 4‑81  
Using 4‑46  
Envelopes 2‑11, 2‑15  
Group mode 3‑21, 3‑23  
Error codes 11‑21  
Error indicator 1‑5  
Error messages 11‑17  
H
Handling xvii  
Heavy paper 2‑11  
Horizontal placement 2‑6  
13‑11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
N
I‑fax addresses  
New Address tab  
Using 4‑32  
Numeric keys 1‑5  
Registering in Address Book 4‑63  
Registering in one‑touch buttons 4‑77  
If you cannot solve a problem 11‑31  
O
J
One‑touch buttons  
Job recall 4‑56  
Erasing addresses 4‑85  
Registering e‑mail addresses 4‑75  
Registering fax numbers 4‑71  
Registering file server addresses 4‑79  
Registering group addresses 4‑81  
Registering I‑fax addresses 4‑77  
Storing/editing 4‑71  
L
Labels 2‑11  
Left cover 1‑4  
Legal 2‑12  
Letter 2‑12  
Loading  
Using 4‑45  
Orientation 2‑6  
Original  
Requirements 2‑2  
Original and paper 2‑1  
Envelopes 2‑15  
Feeder 2‑9  
Originals 2‑5  
Paper 2‑15  
Platen glass 2‑7  
Preprinted paper 2‑29  
Original output area 1‑3  
Original requirements 2‑2  
Originals  
Scanning area 2‑4  
Original sizes 2‑5  
Loading paper  
Stack bypass 2‑15  
Location xxi  
Original supply tray 1‑3  
Log In/Out key 1‑6  
Original type  
Photo mode 3‑10  
Text/Photo mode 3‑10  
Text mode 3‑10  
M
Machine components 1‑2  
Machine settings 12‑1  
Original type selection 3‑11, 4‑26  
Main power indicator 1‑5  
Main power switch 1‑2  
Maintaining the cartridge 1‑21  
Maintenance xvii, 10‑1  
Manual paper selection 3‑6  
Manual sending 4‑52  
P
Paper  
Loading 2‑15  
Printable area 2‑14  
Requirements 2‑11  
Size and type 2‑19  
Paper drawer’s left cover 1‑4  
Manuals for the machine i  
13‑12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper drawers  
S
About the paper drawers 1‑2  
Clearing paper jams 11‑13, 11‑15  
Paper requirements 2‑11  
Paper selection 3‑4  
Paper supply indicator 2‑27  
PC Faxing 8‑1  
Safety instructions xvii  
SCAN key 1‑5  
Scan mode  
Selecting 4‑16  
Scanner feature vii  
Scanning 7‑1  
Photo mode 3‑10  
Scanning area 1‑4, 2‑4  
Plain paper 2‑11  
Scanning originals  
Computer 7‑2  
Scan settings  
Platen glass 1‑4, 2‑7  
Power supply xxiii  
Changing the color mode 4‑18  
Copying 3‑10  
Different size originals 4‑30  
Document size 4‑20  
Original type setting 4‑24  
Resolution 4‑22  
Scan density 4‑24  
Selecting a scan mode 4‑16  
Sending 4‑16  
Preset zoom 3‑14, 3‑15  
Printable area 2‑14  
Printer feature vii  
PRINTER SETTINGS 12‑20  
Printing 6‑1  
Printing USER’S DATA LIST 12‑2  
Processing/Data indicator 1‑6  
Two‑sided originals 4‑28  
Sending/Receiving features iv  
Sending documents 4‑1  
SEND key 1‑5  
R
Receiving documents 5‑1  
Recycled paper 2‑11  
Serial No. key 1‑5  
Recycling cartridge 10‑20  
Service call messages 11‑29  
CANADA PROGRAM 10‑25  
U.S.A. PROGRAM 10‑22  
Setting paper size and type  
Stack bypass 2‑21  
Reduction copy ratios 3‑15  
Setting paper type  
Remote UI 9‑1  
Paper drawers 2‑19  
Setting the speed or print side priority 2‑28  
Remote UI feature vii  
Replacing the cartridge 10‑14  
Replacing the stamp cartridge 10‑12  
Report Settings 12‑27  
Reserved copy 3‑19  
Sleep mode 1‑22  
Slide guides 1‑3, 2‑9  
Reset key 1‑5  
Resolution  
Setting for sending 4‑22  
Rotate mode 3‑22  
13‑13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Two‑Sided copying 3‑25  
Copier 13‑4  
Ethernet interface adaptor 13‑8  
Facsimile 13‑6  
1 to 2‑Sided 3‑25  
2 to 1‑Sided 3‑26  
2 to 2‑Sided 3‑25  
Book to 2‑Sided 3‑26  
Feeder 13‑3  
General 13‑2  
Printer 13‑5  
Send feature 13‑7  
U
USER’S DATA LIST  
Printing 12‑2  
User ID Management  
After using the machine 1‑19  
Before using the machine 1‑18  
Using the printer settings menu 12‑4  
Specifying destinations 4‑32  
Using group addresses 4‑46  
Using the Address Book 4‑43  
Using the favorites buttons 4‑48  
Using the New Address tab 4‑32  
Using the one‑touch buttons 4‑45  
Stack bypass 2‑15  
About the stack bypass 1‑2  
Clearing paper jams 11‑7  
V
Vertical placement 2‑6  
Stamp cartridge  
Replacing 10‑12  
Start key 1‑5  
Z
Zoom by percentage 3‑14, 3‑16  
Stop key 1‑5  
Storing/editing  
Address Book 4‑58  
Favorites buttons 4‑86  
One‑touch buttons 4‑71  
Switching the scanner offline 7‑5  
Switching the scanner online 7‑4  
System Settings viii, 12‑29  
T
Text/Photo mode 3‑10  
Text mode 3‑10  
Timer Settings 1‑22, 12‑11  
Touch panel display  
About the touch panel display 1‑6, 1‑10  
Entering characters 1‑12  
Frequently used keys 1‑10  
Touch panel key display 1‑11  
Transparency 2‑11  
Troubleshooting 11‑1  
13‑14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CANON INC.  
30‑2, Shimomaruko 3‑chome, Ohta‑ku, Tokyo 146‑8501, Japan  
CANON U.S.A., INC.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
CANON CANADA INC.  
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada  
CANON EUROPA N.V.  
Bovenkerkerweg 59‑61 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.  
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France  
CANON COMMUNICATION & IMAGE FRANCE S.A.S.  
(Pour les utilisateurs de l’imprimante laser uniquement)  
12, rue de l’Industrie 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France  
CANON (U.K.) LTD.  
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom  
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH  
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany  
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.  
Via Milano, 8 20097 San Donato Milanese (MI) Italy  
CANON ESPAÑA, S.A.  
c/ Joaquín Costa 41, 28002 Madrid, Spain  
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.  
703 Waterford Way Suite 400, Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.  
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia  
CANON CHINA CO., LTD.  
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China  
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.  
1 HarbourFront Avenue #04‑01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632  
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.  
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong  
FT5‑1106 (000)  
© CANON INC. 2007  
PRINTED IN JAPAN OR CHINA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Binatone Conference Phone 3488 User Manual
Black Box Outdoor Cart Black Box User Manual
Black Box Switch Video Matrix Switches User Manual
Bradley Brand Furniture Plumbing Product COMBI5500 User Manual
Brother Printer 1230 User Manual
Cabletron Systems Switch ELS10 26TX User Manual
Casio Electronic Keyboard AT 3 User Manual
Casio Projector xj s35 User Manual
CFM Ventilation Hood 167193 User Manual
Cisco Systems IP Phone 6921 User Manual